You can not select more than 25 topics Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.

10660 lines
287KB

  1. @chapter Filtering Introduction
  2. @c man begin FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  3. Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
  4. In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
  5. outputs.
  6. To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
  7. following filtergraph.
  8. @example
  9. [main]
  10. input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
  11. | ^
  12. |[tmp] [flip]|
  13. +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
  14. @end example
  15. This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
  16. stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
  17. back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
  18. following command to achieve this:
  19. @example
  20. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
  21. @end example
  22. The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
  23. onto the bottom half of the output video.
  24. Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
  25. linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
  26. @var{crop,vflip} are in one linear chain, @var{split} and
  27. @var{overlay} are separately in another. The points where the linear
  28. chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
  29. example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
  30. the labels @var{[main]} and @var{[tmp]}.
  31. The stream sent to the second output of @var{split}, labelled as
  32. @var{[tmp]}, is processed through the @var{crop} filter, which crops
  33. away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
  34. @var{overlay} filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
  35. split filter (which was labelled as @var{[main]}), and overlay on its
  36. lower half the output generated by the @var{crop,vflip} filterchain.
  37. Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
  38. after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
  39. by a colon.
  40. There exist so-called @var{source filters} that do not have an
  41. audio/video input, and @var{sink filters} that will not have audio/video
  42. output.
  43. @c man end FILTERING INTRODUCTION
  44. @chapter graph2dot
  45. @c man begin GRAPH2DOT
  46. The @file{graph2dot} program included in the FFmpeg @file{tools}
  47. directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
  48. corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
  49. Invoke the command:
  50. @example
  51. graph2dot -h
  52. @end example
  53. to see how to use @file{graph2dot}.
  54. You can then pass the dot description to the @file{dot} program (from
  55. the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
  56. of the filtergraph.
  57. For example the sequence of commands:
  58. @example
  59. echo @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} | \
  60. tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
  61. dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
  62. display graph.png
  63. @end example
  64. can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
  65. described by the @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string. Note that this string must be
  66. a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
  67. For example if your command line is of the form:
  68. @example
  69. ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
  70. @end example
  71. your @var{GRAPH_DESCRIPTION} string will need to be of the form:
  72. @example
  73. nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
  74. @end example
  75. you may also need to set the @var{nullsrc} parameters and add a @var{format}
  76. filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
  77. @c man end GRAPH2DOT
  78. @chapter Filtergraph description
  79. @c man begin FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  80. A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
  81. cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
  82. filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
  83. filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
  84. side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
  85. Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
  86. registered in the application, which defines the features and the
  87. number of input and output pads of the filter.
  88. A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
  89. output pads is called a "sink".
  90. @anchor{Filtergraph syntax}
  91. @section Filtergraph syntax
  92. A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
  93. recognized by the @option{-filter}/@option{-vf} and @option{-filter_complex}
  94. options in @command{ffmpeg} and @option{-vf} in @command{ffplay}, and by the
  95. @code{avfilter_graph_parse()}/@code{avfilter_graph_parse2()} functions defined in
  96. @file{libavfilter/avfilter.h}.
  97. A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
  98. connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
  99. represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
  100. A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
  101. filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
  102. descriptions.
  103. A filter is represented by a string of the form:
  104. [@var{in_link_1}]...[@var{in_link_N}]@var{filter_name}=@var{arguments}[@var{out_link_1}]...[@var{out_link_M}]
  105. @var{filter_name} is the name of the filter class of which the
  106. described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
  107. the filter classes registered in the program.
  108. The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
  109. "=@var{arguments}".
  110. @var{arguments} is a string which contains the parameters used to
  111. initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
  112. @itemize
  113. @item
  114. A ':'-separated list of @var{key=value} pairs.
  115. @item
  116. A ':'-separated list of @var{value}. In this case, the keys are assumed to be
  117. the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the @code{fade} filter
  118. declares three options in this order -- @option{type}, @option{start_frame} and
  119. @option{nb_frames}. Then the parameter list @var{in:0:30} means that the value
  120. @var{in} is assigned to the option @option{type}, @var{0} to
  121. @option{start_frame} and @var{30} to @option{nb_frames}.
  122. @item
  123. A ':'-separated list of mixed direct @var{value} and long @var{key=value}
  124. pairs. The direct @var{value} must precede the @var{key=value} pairs, and
  125. follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
  126. @var{key=value} pairs can be set in any preferred order.
  127. @end itemize
  128. If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the @code{format} filter
  129. takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
  130. '|'.
  131. The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "'" as initial
  132. and ending mark, and the character '\' for escaping the characters
  133. within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
  134. terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
  135. "[]=;,") is encountered.
  136. The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
  137. followed by a list of link labels.
  138. A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
  139. or input pad. The preceding labels @var{in_link_1}
  140. ... @var{in_link_N}, are associated to the filter input pads,
  141. the following labels @var{out_link_1} ... @var{out_link_M}, are
  142. associated to the output pads.
  143. When two link labels with the same name are found in the
  144. filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
  145. created.
  146. If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
  147. unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
  148. For example in the filterchain
  149. @example
  150. nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
  151. @end example
  152. the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
  153. instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
  154. "L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
  155. output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
  156. which are both unlabelled.
  157. In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
  158. pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
  159. filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
  160. Libavfilter will automatically insert @ref{scale} filters where format
  161. conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
  162. for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
  163. @code{sws_flags=@var{flags};}
  164. to the filtergraph description.
  165. Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
  166. @example
  167. @var{NAME} ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
  168. @var{LINKLABEL} ::= "[" @var{NAME} "]"
  169. @var{LINKLABELS} ::= @var{LINKLABEL} [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  170. @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS} ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
  171. @var{FILTER} ::= [@var{LINKLABELS}] @var{NAME} ["=" @var{FILTER_ARGUMENTS}] [@var{LINKLABELS}]
  172. @var{FILTERCHAIN} ::= @var{FILTER} [,@var{FILTERCHAIN}]
  173. @var{FILTERGRAPH} ::= [sws_flags=@var{flags};] @var{FILTERCHAIN} [;@var{FILTERGRAPH}]
  174. @end example
  175. @section Notes on filtergraph escaping
  176. Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
  177. escaping. See @ref{quoting_and_escaping,,the "Quoting and escaping"
  178. section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils} for more
  179. information about the employed escaping procedure.
  180. A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
  181. value, which may contain the special character @code{:} used to
  182. separate values, or one of the escaping characters @code{\'}.
  183. A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
  184. may contain the escaping characters @code{\'} or the special
  185. characters @code{[],;} used by the filtergraph description.
  186. Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
  187. need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
  188. characters contained within it.
  189. For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
  190. the @ref{drawtext} filter description @option{text} value:
  191. @example
  192. this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
  193. @end example
  194. This string contains the @code{'} special escaping character, and the
  195. @code{:} special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
  196. @example
  197. text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
  198. @end example
  199. A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
  200. description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
  201. filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
  202. @example
  203. drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
  204. @end example
  205. (note that in addition to the @code{\'} escaping special characters,
  206. also @code{,} needs to be escaped).
  207. Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
  208. filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
  209. escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
  210. @code{\} is special and needs to be escaped with another @code{\}, the
  211. previous string will finally result in:
  212. @example
  213. -vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
  214. @end example
  215. @chapter Timeline editing
  216. Some filters support a generic @option{enable} option. For the filters
  217. supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
  218. evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
  219. the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
  220. next filter in the filtergraph.
  221. The expression accepts the following values:
  222. @table @samp
  223. @item t
  224. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  225. @item n
  226. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
  227. @item pos
  228. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  229. @end table
  230. Additionally, these filters support an @option{enable} command that can be used
  231. to re-define the expression.
  232. Like any other filtering option, the @option{enable} option follows the same
  233. rules.
  234. For example, to enable a blur filter (@ref{smartblur}) from 10 seconds to 3
  235. minutes, and a @ref{curves} filter starting at 3 seconds:
  236. @example
  237. smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
  238. curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
  239. @end example
  240. @c man end FILTERGRAPH DESCRIPTION
  241. @chapter Audio Filters
  242. @c man begin AUDIO FILTERS
  243. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  244. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  245. The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
  246. build.
  247. Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
  248. @section aconvert
  249. Convert the input audio format to the specified formats.
  250. @emph{This filter is deprecated. Use @ref{aformat} instead.}
  251. The filter accepts a string of the form:
  252. "@var{sample_format}:@var{channel_layout}".
  253. @var{sample_format} specifies the sample format, and can be a string or the
  254. corresponding numeric value defined in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}. Use 'p'
  255. suffix for a planar sample format.
  256. @var{channel_layout} specifies the channel layout, and can be a string
  257. or the corresponding number value defined in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}.
  258. The special parameter "auto", signifies that the filter will
  259. automatically select the output format depending on the output filter.
  260. @subsection Examples
  261. @itemize
  262. @item
  263. Convert input to float, planar, stereo:
  264. @example
  265. aconvert=fltp:stereo
  266. @end example
  267. @item
  268. Convert input to unsigned 8-bit, automatically select out channel layout:
  269. @example
  270. aconvert=u8:auto
  271. @end example
  272. @end itemize
  273. @section adelay
  274. Delay one or more audio channels.
  275. Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
  276. The filter accepts the following option:
  277. @table @option
  278. @item delays
  279. Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by '|'.
  280. At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
  281. Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
  282. smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
  283. @end table
  284. @subsection Examples
  285. @itemize
  286. @item
  287. Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
  288. the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
  289. @example
  290. adelay=1500|0|500
  291. @end example
  292. @end itemize
  293. @section aecho
  294. Apply echoing to the input audio.
  295. Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
  296. (and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
  297. effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
  298. sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
  299. original signal and the reflection is the @code{delay}, and the
  300. loudness of the reflected signal is the @code{decay}.
  301. Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
  302. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  303. @table @option
  304. @item in_gain
  305. Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.6}.
  306. @item out_gain
  307. Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is @code{0.3}.
  308. @item delays
  309. Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
  310. separated by '|'. Allowed range for each @code{delay} is @code{(0 - 90000.0]}.
  311. Default is @code{1000}.
  312. @item decays
  313. Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by '|'.
  314. Allowed range for each @code{decay} is @code{(0 - 1.0]}.
  315. Default is @code{0.5}.
  316. @end table
  317. @subsection Examples
  318. @itemize
  319. @item
  320. Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
  321. @example
  322. aecho=0.8:0.88:60:0.4
  323. @end example
  324. @item
  325. If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
  326. @example
  327. aecho=0.8:0.88:6:0.4
  328. @end example
  329. @item
  330. A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
  331. @example
  332. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
  333. @end example
  334. @item
  335. Same as above but with one more mountain:
  336. @example
  337. aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
  338. @end example
  339. @end itemize
  340. @section aeval
  341. Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
  342. This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
  343. which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
  344. It accepts the following parameters:
  345. @table @option
  346. @item exprs
  347. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
  348. the number of input channels is greater than the number of
  349. expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
  350. output channels.
  351. @item channel_layout, c
  352. Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
  353. specified by the number of expressions. If set to @samp{same}, it will
  354. use by default the same input channel layout.
  355. @end table
  356. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants and functions:
  357. @table @option
  358. @item ch
  359. channel number of the current expression
  360. @item n
  361. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  362. @item s
  363. sample rate
  364. @item t
  365. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
  366. @item nb_in_channels
  367. @item nb_out_channels
  368. input and output number of channels
  369. @item val(CH)
  370. the value of input channel with number @var{CH}
  371. @end table
  372. Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
  373. dedicated filter.
  374. @subsection Examples
  375. @itemize
  376. @item
  377. Half volume:
  378. @example
  379. aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
  380. @end example
  381. @item
  382. Invert phase of the second channel:
  383. @example
  384. eval=val(0)|-val(1)
  385. @end example
  386. @end itemize
  387. @section afade
  388. Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
  389. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  390. @table @option
  391. @item type, t
  392. Specify the effect type, can be either @code{in} for fade-in, or
  393. @code{out} for a fade-out effect. Default is @code{in}.
  394. @item start_sample, ss
  395. Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
  396. effect. Default is 0.
  397. @item nb_samples, ns
  398. Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
  399. the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  400. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  401. the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
  402. @item start_time, st
  403. Specify time for starting to apply the fade effect. Default is 0.
  404. The accepted syntax is:
  405. @example
  406. [-]HH[:MM[:SS[.m...]]]
  407. [-]S+[.m...]
  408. @end example
  409. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  410. If set this option is used instead of @var{start_sample} one.
  411. @item duration, d
  412. Specify the duration for which the fade effect has to last. Default is 0.
  413. The accepted syntax is:
  414. @example
  415. [-]HH[:MM[:SS[.m...]]]
  416. [-]S+[.m...]
  417. @end example
  418. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  419. At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
  420. volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
  421. the output audio will be silence.
  422. If set this option is used instead of @var{nb_samples} one.
  423. @item curve
  424. Set curve for fade transition.
  425. It accepts the following values:
  426. @table @option
  427. @item tri
  428. select triangular, linear slope (default)
  429. @item qsin
  430. select quarter of sine wave
  431. @item hsin
  432. select half of sine wave
  433. @item esin
  434. select exponential sine wave
  435. @item log
  436. select logarithmic
  437. @item par
  438. select inverted parabola
  439. @item qua
  440. select quadratic
  441. @item cub
  442. select cubic
  443. @item squ
  444. select square root
  445. @item cbr
  446. select cubic root
  447. @end table
  448. @end table
  449. @subsection Examples
  450. @itemize
  451. @item
  452. Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
  453. @example
  454. afade=t=in:ss=0:d=15
  455. @end example
  456. @item
  457. Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
  458. @example
  459. afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
  460. @end example
  461. @end itemize
  462. @anchor{aformat}
  463. @section aformat
  464. Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
  465. negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
  466. It accepts the following parameters:
  467. @table @option
  468. @item sample_fmts
  469. A '|'-separated list of requested sample formats.
  470. @item sample_rates
  471. A '|'-separated list of requested sample rates.
  472. @item channel_layouts
  473. A '|'-separated list of requested channel layouts.
  474. See @ref{channel layout syntax,,the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual,ffmpeg-utils}
  475. for the required syntax.
  476. @end table
  477. If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
  478. Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
  479. @example
  480. aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
  481. @end example
  482. @section allpass
  483. Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
  484. @var{frequency}, and filter-width @var{width}.
  485. An all-pass filter changes the audio's frequency to phase relationship
  486. without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
  487. The filter accepts the following options:
  488. @table @option
  489. @item frequency, f
  490. Set frequency in Hz.
  491. @item width_type
  492. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  493. @table @option
  494. @item h
  495. Hz
  496. @item q
  497. Q-Factor
  498. @item o
  499. octave
  500. @item s
  501. slope
  502. @end table
  503. @item width, w
  504. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  505. @end table
  506. @section amerge
  507. Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
  508. The filter accepts the following options:
  509. @table @option
  510. @item inputs
  511. Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
  512. @end table
  513. If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
  514. the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
  515. will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
  516. disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
  517. the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
  518. the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
  519. channels.
  520. For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
  521. is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
  522. following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
  523. first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
  524. On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
  525. in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
  526. arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
  527. All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
  528. If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
  529. shortest.
  530. @subsection Examples
  531. @itemize
  532. @item
  533. Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
  534. @example
  535. amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
  536. @end example
  537. @item
  538. Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in @file{input.mkv}:
  539. @example
  540. ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
  541. @end example
  542. @end itemize
  543. @section amix
  544. Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
  545. Note that this filter only supports float samples (the @var{amerge}
  546. and @var{pan} audio filters support many formats). If the @var{amix}
  547. input has integer samples then @ref{aresample} will be automatically
  548. inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
  549. For example
  550. @example
  551. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
  552. @end example
  553. will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
  554. first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
  555. It accepts the following parameters:
  556. @table @option
  557. @item inputs
  558. The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  559. @item duration
  560. How to determine the end-of-stream.
  561. @table @option
  562. @item longest
  563. The duration of the longest input. (default)
  564. @item shortest
  565. The duration of the shortest input.
  566. @item first
  567. The duration of the first input.
  568. @end table
  569. @item dropout_transition
  570. The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
  571. stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
  572. @end table
  573. @section anull
  574. Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
  575. @section apad
  576. Pad the end of a audio stream with silence, this can be used together with
  577. -shortest to extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
  578. @section aphaser
  579. Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
  580. A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
  581. The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
  582. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  583. @table @option
  584. @item in_gain
  585. Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
  586. @item out_gain
  587. Set output gain. Default is 0.74
  588. @item delay
  589. Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
  590. @item decay
  591. Set decay. Default is 0.4.
  592. @item speed
  593. Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
  594. @item type
  595. Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
  596. It accepts the following values:
  597. @table @samp
  598. @item triangular, t
  599. @item sinusoidal, s
  600. @end table
  601. @end table
  602. @anchor{aresample}
  603. @section aresample
  604. Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
  605. libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
  606. automatically convert between its input and output.
  607. This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
  608. the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
  609. timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
  610. The filter accepts the syntax
  611. [@var{sample_rate}:]@var{resampler_options}, where @var{sample_rate}
  612. expresses a sample rate and @var{resampler_options} is a list of
  613. @var{key}=@var{value} pairs, separated by ":". See the
  614. ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
  615. @subsection Examples
  616. @itemize
  617. @item
  618. Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
  619. @example
  620. aresample=44100
  621. @end example
  622. @item
  623. Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
  624. samples per second compensation:
  625. @example
  626. aresample=async=1000
  627. @end example
  628. @end itemize
  629. @section asetnsamples
  630. Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
  631. The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
  632. the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
  633. signal its end.
  634. The filter accepts the following options:
  635. @table @option
  636. @item nb_out_samples, n
  637. Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
  638. intended as the number of samples @emph{per each channel}.
  639. Default value is 1024.
  640. @item pad, p
  641. If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
  642. that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
  643. previous ones. Default value is 1.
  644. @end table
  645. For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
  646. disable padding for the last frame, use:
  647. @example
  648. asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
  649. @end example
  650. @section asetrate
  651. Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
  652. This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
  653. The filter accepts the following options:
  654. @table @option
  655. @item sample_rate, r
  656. Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
  657. @end table
  658. @section ashowinfo
  659. Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
  660. The input audio is not modified.
  661. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  662. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  663. It accepts the following parameters:
  664. @table @option
  665. @item n
  666. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  667. @item pts
  668. The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
  669. depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/@var{sample_rate}.
  670. @item pts_time
  671. The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
  672. @item pos
  673. position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
  674. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
  675. @item fmt
  676. The sample format.
  677. @item chlayout
  678. The channel layout.
  679. @item rate
  680. The sample rate for the audio frame.
  681. @item nb_samples
  682. The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
  683. @item checksum
  684. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
  685. audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
  686. @item plane_checksums
  687. A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
  688. @end table
  689. @section astats
  690. Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
  691. Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
  692. where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
  693. It accepts the following option:
  694. @table @option
  695. @item length
  696. Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
  697. Default is @code{0.05} (50 miliseconds). Allowed range is @code{[0.1 - 10]}.
  698. @end table
  699. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  700. @table @option
  701. @item DC offset
  702. Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
  703. @item Min level
  704. Minimal sample level.
  705. @item Max level
  706. Maximal sample level.
  707. @item Peak level dB
  708. @item RMS level dB
  709. Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
  710. @item RMS peak dB
  711. @item RMS trough dB
  712. Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
  713. @item Crest factor
  714. Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
  715. @item Flat factor
  716. Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
  717. (i.e. either @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}).
  718. @item Peak count
  719. Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
  720. @var{Min level} or @var{Max level}.
  721. @end table
  722. @section astreamsync
  723. Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
  724. The filter accepts the following options:
  725. @table @option
  726. @item expr, e
  727. Set the expression deciding which stream should be
  728. forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
  729. the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
  730. the following variables:
  731. @table @var
  732. @item b1 b2
  733. number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
  734. @item s1 s2
  735. number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
  736. @item t1 t2
  737. current timestamp of each stream
  738. @end table
  739. The default value is @code{t1-t2}, which means to always forward the stream
  740. that has a smaller timestamp.
  741. @end table
  742. @subsection Examples
  743. Stress-test @code{amerge} by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
  744. input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
  745. @example
  746. amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
  747. [a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
  748. [a2] [b2] amerge
  749. @end example
  750. @section asyncts
  751. Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
  752. dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
  753. This filter is not built by default, please use @ref{aresample} to do squeezing/stretching.
  754. It accepts the following parameters:
  755. @table @option
  756. @item compensate
  757. Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
  758. by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
  759. @item min_delta
  760. The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
  761. adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
  762. sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
  763. @item max_comp
  764. The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
  765. The default value is 500.
  766. @item first_pts
  767. Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
  768. rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
  769. no assumption is made about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or
  770. trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
  771. silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
  772. with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
  773. @end table
  774. @section atempo
  775. Adjust audio tempo.
  776. The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
  777. specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
  778. be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
  779. @subsection Examples
  780. @itemize
  781. @item
  782. Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
  783. @example
  784. atempo=0.8
  785. @end example
  786. @item
  787. To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
  788. @example
  789. atempo=1.25
  790. @end example
  791. @end itemize
  792. @section atrim
  793. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  794. It accepts the following parameters:
  795. @table @option
  796. @item start
  797. Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
  798. sample with the timestamp @var{start} will be the first sample in the output.
  799. @item end
  800. Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
  801. audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be
  802. the last sample in the output.
  803. @item start_pts
  804. Same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
  805. instead of seconds.
  806. @item end_pts
  807. Same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
  808. of seconds.
  809. @item duration
  810. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  811. @item start_sample
  812. The number of the first sample that should be output.
  813. @item end_sample
  814. The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
  815. @end table
  816. @option{start}, @option{end}, @option{duration} are expressed as time
  817. duration specifications, check the "Time duration" section in the
  818. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  819. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  820. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
  821. samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
  822. give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
  823. zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
  824. to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
  825. atrim filter.
  826. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  827. keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  828. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
  829. filters.
  830. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  831. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  832. Examples:
  833. @itemize
  834. @item
  835. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  836. @example
  837. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
  838. @end example
  839. @item
  840. Keep only the first 1000 samples:
  841. @example
  842. ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
  843. @end example
  844. @end itemize
  845. @section bandpass
  846. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
  847. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width width.
  848. The @var{csg} option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
  849. instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
  850. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  851. The filter accepts the following options:
  852. @table @option
  853. @item frequency, f
  854. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  855. @item csg
  856. Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
  857. @item width_type
  858. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  859. @table @option
  860. @item h
  861. Hz
  862. @item q
  863. Q-Factor
  864. @item o
  865. octave
  866. @item s
  867. slope
  868. @end table
  869. @item width, w
  870. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  871. @end table
  872. @section bandreject
  873. Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
  874. frequency @var{frequency}, and (3dB-point) band-width @var{width}.
  875. The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
  876. The filter accepts the following options:
  877. @table @option
  878. @item frequency, f
  879. Set the filter's central frequency. Default is @code{3000}.
  880. @item width_type
  881. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  882. @table @option
  883. @item h
  884. Hz
  885. @item q
  886. Q-Factor
  887. @item o
  888. octave
  889. @item s
  890. slope
  891. @end table
  892. @item width, w
  893. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  894. @end table
  895. @section bass
  896. Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  897. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  898. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  899. The filter accepts the following options:
  900. @table @option
  901. @item gain, g
  902. Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
  903. (for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
  904. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  905. @item frequency, f
  906. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  907. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  908. The default value is @code{100} Hz.
  909. @item width_type
  910. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  911. @table @option
  912. @item h
  913. Hz
  914. @item q
  915. Q-Factor
  916. @item o
  917. octave
  918. @item s
  919. slope
  920. @end table
  921. @item width, w
  922. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  923. @end table
  924. @section biquad
  925. Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
  926. Where @var{b0}, @var{b1}, @var{b2} and @var{a0}, @var{a1}, @var{a2}
  927. are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
  928. @section bs2b
  929. Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
  930. stereo audio records.
  931. It accepts the following parameters:
  932. @table @option
  933. @item profile
  934. Pre-defined crossfeed level.
  935. @table @option
  936. @item default
  937. Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
  938. @item cmoy
  939. Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
  940. @item jmeier
  941. Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
  942. @end table
  943. @item fcut
  944. Cut frequency (in Hz).
  945. @item feed
  946. Feed level (in Hz).
  947. @end table
  948. @section channelmap
  949. Remap input channels to new locations.
  950. It accepts the following parameters:
  951. @table @option
  952. @item channel_layout
  953. The channel layout of the output stream.
  954. @item map
  955. Map channels from input to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  956. mappings, each in the @code{@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}} or
  957. @var{in_channel} form. @var{in_channel} can be either the name of the input
  958. channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
  959. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
  960. channel layout. If @var{out_channel} is not given then it is implicitly an
  961. index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
  962. @end table
  963. If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
  964. output channels, preserving indices.
  965. For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
  966. @example
  967. ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
  968. @end example
  969. will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
  970. the input.
  971. To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC's native channel order
  972. @example
  973. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
  974. @end example
  975. @section channelsplit
  976. Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
  977. It accepts the following parameters:
  978. @table @option
  979. @item channel_layout
  980. The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
  981. @end table
  982. For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
  983. @example
  984. ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
  985. @end example
  986. will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
  987. the left channel and the other the right channel.
  988. Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
  989. @example
  990. ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
  991. 'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
  992. -map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
  993. front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
  994. side_right.wav
  995. @end example
  996. @section compand
  997. Compress or expand the audio's dynamic range.
  998. It accepts the following parameters:
  999. @table @option
  1000. @item attacks
  1001. @item decays
  1002. A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
  1003. of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. @var{attacks} refers to
  1004. increase of volume and @var{decays} refers to decrease of volume. For most
  1005. situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
  1006. shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
  1007. loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
  1008. a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
  1009. @item points
  1010. A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
  1011. maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
  1012. the following syntax: @code{x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|....} or
  1013. @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....}
  1014. The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
  1015. does not have to be monotonically rising. The point @code{0/0} is assumed but
  1016. may be overridden (by @code{0/out-dBn}). Typical values for the transfer
  1017. function are @code{-70/-70|-60/-20}.
  1018. @item soft-knee
  1019. Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
  1020. @item gain
  1021. Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
  1022. function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
  1023. It defaults to 0.
  1024. @item volume
  1025. Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
  1026. starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
  1027. example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
  1028. companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
  1029. quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
  1030. @item delay
  1031. Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
  1032. delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
  1033. approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
  1034. operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
  1035. @end table
  1036. @subsection Examples
  1037. @itemize
  1038. @item
  1039. Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
  1040. noisy environment:
  1041. @example
  1042. compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
  1043. @end example
  1044. @item
  1045. A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
  1046. @example
  1047. compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
  1048. @end example
  1049. @item
  1050. Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
  1051. than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
  1052. @example
  1053. compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
  1054. @end example
  1055. @end itemize
  1056. @section earwax
  1057. Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
  1058. This filter adds `cues' to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
  1059. so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
  1060. inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
  1061. the listener (standard for speakers).
  1062. Ported from SoX.
  1063. @section equalizer
  1064. Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
  1065. filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
  1066. be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
  1067. filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
  1068. In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
  1069. be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
  1070. The filter accepts the following options:
  1071. @table @option
  1072. @item frequency, f
  1073. Set the filter's central frequency in Hz.
  1074. @item width_type
  1075. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1076. @table @option
  1077. @item h
  1078. Hz
  1079. @item q
  1080. Q-Factor
  1081. @item o
  1082. octave
  1083. @item s
  1084. slope
  1085. @end table
  1086. @item width, w
  1087. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1088. @item gain, g
  1089. Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
  1090. Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1091. @end table
  1092. @subsection Examples
  1093. @itemize
  1094. @item
  1095. Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
  1096. @example
  1097. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
  1098. @end example
  1099. @item
  1100. Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
  1101. @example
  1102. equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
  1103. @end example
  1104. @end itemize
  1105. @section highpass
  1106. Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1107. The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
  1108. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1109. The filter accepts the following options:
  1110. @table @option
  1111. @item frequency, f
  1112. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
  1113. @item poles, p
  1114. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1115. @item width_type
  1116. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1117. @table @option
  1118. @item h
  1119. Hz
  1120. @item q
  1121. Q-Factor
  1122. @item o
  1123. octave
  1124. @item s
  1125. slope
  1126. @end table
  1127. @item width, w
  1128. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1129. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1130. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1131. @end table
  1132. @section join
  1133. Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
  1134. It accepts the following parameters:
  1135. @table @option
  1136. @item inputs
  1137. The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
  1138. @item channel_layout
  1139. The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
  1140. @item map
  1141. Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a '|'-separated list of
  1142. mappings, each in the @code{@var{input_idx}.@var{in_channel}-@var{out_channel}}
  1143. form. @var{input_idx} is the 0-based index of the input stream. @var{in_channel}
  1144. can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
  1145. index in the specified input stream. @var{out_channel} is the name of the output
  1146. channel.
  1147. @end table
  1148. The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
  1149. explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
  1150. and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
  1151. Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
  1152. @example
  1153. ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
  1154. @end example
  1155. Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
  1156. @example
  1157. ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
  1158. 'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
  1159. out
  1160. @end example
  1161. @section ladspa
  1162. Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer's Simple Plugin API) plugin.
  1163. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1164. @code{--enable-ladspa}.
  1165. @table @option
  1166. @item file, f
  1167. Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
  1168. variable @env{LADSPA_PATH} is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
  1169. each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
  1170. @env{LADSPA_PATH}, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
  1171. this order: @file{HOME/.ladspa/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/ladspa/},
  1172. @file{/usr/lib/ladspa/}.
  1173. @item plugin, p
  1174. Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
  1175. one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
  1176. will list all available plugins within the specified library.
  1177. @item controls, c
  1178. Set the '|' separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
  1179. values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
  1180. threshold or gain).
  1181. Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
  1182. c0=@var{value0}|c1=@var{value1}|c2=@var{value2}|..., where
  1183. @var{valuei} is the value set on the @var{i}-th control.
  1184. If @option{controls} is set to @code{help}, all available controls and
  1185. their valid ranges are printed.
  1186. @item sample_rate, s
  1187. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
  1188. zero inputs.
  1189. @item nb_samples, n
  1190. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
  1191. is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1192. @item duration, d
  1193. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See the function
  1194. @code{av_parse_time()} for the accepted format, also check the "Time duration"
  1195. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  1196. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
  1197. as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
  1198. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1199. supposed to be generated forever.
  1200. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
  1201. @end table
  1202. @subsection Examples
  1203. @itemize
  1204. @item
  1205. List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
  1206. @example
  1207. ladspa=file=amp
  1208. @end example
  1209. @item
  1210. List all available controls and their valid ranges for @code{vcf_notch}
  1211. plugin from @code{VCF} library:
  1212. @example
  1213. ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
  1214. @end example
  1215. @item
  1216. Simulate low quality audio equipment using @code{Computer Music Toolkit} (CMT)
  1217. plugin library:
  1218. @example
  1219. ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
  1220. @end example
  1221. @item
  1222. Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
  1223. (Tom's Audio Processing plugins):
  1224. @example
  1225. ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
  1226. @end example
  1227. @item
  1228. Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
  1229. @example
  1230. ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
  1231. @end example
  1232. @item
  1233. Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin @code{C* Click - Metronome} from the
  1234. @code{C* Audio Plugin Suite} (CAPS) library:
  1235. @example
  1236. ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
  1237. @end example
  1238. @item
  1239. Apply @code{C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser} effect:
  1240. @example
  1241. ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
  1242. @end example
  1243. @end itemize
  1244. @subsection Commands
  1245. This filter supports the following commands:
  1246. @table @option
  1247. @item cN
  1248. Modify the @var{N}-th control value.
  1249. If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
  1250. @end table
  1251. @section lowpass
  1252. Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
  1253. The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
  1254. The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
  1255. The filter accepts the following options:
  1256. @table @option
  1257. @item frequency, f
  1258. Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
  1259. @item poles, p
  1260. Set number of poles. Default is 2.
  1261. @item width_type
  1262. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1263. @table @option
  1264. @item h
  1265. Hz
  1266. @item q
  1267. Q-Factor
  1268. @item o
  1269. octave
  1270. @item s
  1271. slope
  1272. @end table
  1273. @item width, w
  1274. Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
  1275. Applies only to double-pole filter.
  1276. The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
  1277. @end table
  1278. @section pan
  1279. Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
  1280. channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
  1281. This filter is also designed to remap efficiently the channels of an audio
  1282. stream.
  1283. The filter accepts parameters of the form:
  1284. "@var{l}:@var{outdef}:@var{outdef}:..."
  1285. @table @option
  1286. @item l
  1287. output channel layout or number of channels
  1288. @item outdef
  1289. output channel specification, of the form:
  1290. "@var{out_name}=[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}[+[@var{gain}*]@var{in_name}...]"
  1291. @item out_name
  1292. output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
  1293. number (c0, c1, etc.)
  1294. @item gain
  1295. multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
  1296. @item in_name
  1297. input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
  1298. named and numbered input channels
  1299. @end table
  1300. If the `=' in a channel specification is replaced by `<', then the gains for
  1301. that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
  1302. avoiding clipping noise.
  1303. @subsection Mixing examples
  1304. For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
  1305. factor for the left channel:
  1306. @example
  1307. pan=1:c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
  1308. @end example
  1309. A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
  1310. 7-channels surround:
  1311. @example
  1312. pan=stereo: FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL : FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
  1313. @end example
  1314. Note that @command{ffmpeg} integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
  1315. that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
  1316. needs.
  1317. @subsection Remapping examples
  1318. The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
  1319. @itemize
  1320. @item gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
  1321. @item only one input per channel output,
  1322. @end itemize
  1323. If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
  1324. channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
  1325. remapping.
  1326. For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
  1327. dropping the extra channels:
  1328. @example
  1329. pan="stereo: c0=FL : c1=FR"
  1330. @end example
  1331. Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
  1332. and keep the input channel layout:
  1333. @example
  1334. pan="5.1: c0=c1 : c1=c0 : c2=c2 : c3=c3 : c4=c4 : c5=c5"
  1335. @end example
  1336. If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
  1337. still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
  1338. @example
  1339. pan="stereo:c1=c1"
  1340. @end example
  1341. Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
  1342. front left and right:
  1343. @example
  1344. pan="stereo: c0=FR : c1=FR"
  1345. @end example
  1346. @section replaygain
  1347. ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
  1348. outputs it unchanged.
  1349. At end of filtering it displays @code{track_gain} and @code{track_peak}.
  1350. @section resample
  1351. Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
  1352. not meant to be used directly.
  1353. @section silencedetect
  1354. Detect silence in an audio stream.
  1355. This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
  1356. or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
  1357. minimum detected noise duration.
  1358. The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
  1359. The filter accepts the following options:
  1360. @table @option
  1361. @item duration, d
  1362. Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
  1363. @item noise, n
  1364. Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
  1365. specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
  1366. @end table
  1367. @subsection Examples
  1368. @itemize
  1369. @item
  1370. Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
  1371. @example
  1372. silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
  1373. @end example
  1374. @item
  1375. Complete example with @command{ffmpeg} to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
  1376. tolerance in @file{silence.mp3}:
  1377. @example
  1378. ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
  1379. @end example
  1380. @end itemize
  1381. @section treble
  1382. Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
  1383. shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
  1384. hi-fi's tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
  1385. The filter accepts the following options:
  1386. @table @option
  1387. @item gain, g
  1388. Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
  1389. Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
  1390. to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
  1391. @item frequency, f
  1392. Set the filter's central frequency and so can be used
  1393. to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
  1394. The default value is @code{3000} Hz.
  1395. @item width_type
  1396. Set method to specify band-width of filter.
  1397. @table @option
  1398. @item h
  1399. Hz
  1400. @item q
  1401. Q-Factor
  1402. @item o
  1403. octave
  1404. @item s
  1405. slope
  1406. @end table
  1407. @item width, w
  1408. Determine how steep is the filter's shelf transition.
  1409. @end table
  1410. @section volume
  1411. Adjust the input audio volume.
  1412. It accepts the following parameters:
  1413. @table @option
  1414. @item volume
  1415. Set audio volume expression.
  1416. Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
  1417. The output audio volume is given by the relation:
  1418. @example
  1419. @var{output_volume} = @var{volume} * @var{input_volume}
  1420. @end example
  1421. The default value for @var{volume} is "1.0".
  1422. @item precision
  1423. This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
  1424. It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
  1425. precision of the volume scaling.
  1426. @table @option
  1427. @item fixed
  1428. 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
  1429. @item float
  1430. 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
  1431. @item double
  1432. 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
  1433. @end table
  1434. @item replaygain
  1435. Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
  1436. @table @option
  1437. @item drop
  1438. Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
  1439. @item ignore
  1440. Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
  1441. @item track
  1442. Prefer the track gain, if present.
  1443. @item album
  1444. Prefer the album gain, if present.
  1445. @end table
  1446. @item replaygain_preamp
  1447. Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
  1448. Default value for @var{replaygain_preamp} is 0.0.
  1449. @item eval
  1450. Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
  1451. It accepts the following values:
  1452. @table @samp
  1453. @item once
  1454. only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
  1455. when the @samp{volume} command is sent
  1456. @item frame
  1457. evaluate expression for each incoming frame
  1458. @end table
  1459. Default value is @samp{once}.
  1460. @end table
  1461. The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
  1462. @table @option
  1463. @item n
  1464. frame number (starting at zero)
  1465. @item nb_channels
  1466. number of channels
  1467. @item nb_consumed_samples
  1468. number of samples consumed by the filter
  1469. @item nb_samples
  1470. number of samples in the current frame
  1471. @item pos
  1472. original frame position in the file
  1473. @item pts
  1474. frame PTS
  1475. @item sample_rate
  1476. sample rate
  1477. @item startpts
  1478. PTS at start of stream
  1479. @item startt
  1480. time at start of stream
  1481. @item t
  1482. frame time
  1483. @item tb
  1484. timestamp timebase
  1485. @item volume
  1486. last set volume value
  1487. @end table
  1488. Note that when @option{eval} is set to @samp{once} only the
  1489. @var{sample_rate} and @var{tb} variables are available, all other
  1490. variables will evaluate to NAN.
  1491. @subsection Commands
  1492. This filter supports the following commands:
  1493. @table @option
  1494. @item volume
  1495. Modify the volume expression.
  1496. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  1497. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  1498. value.
  1499. @item replaygain_noclip
  1500. Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
  1501. Default value for @var{replaygain_noclip} is 1.
  1502. @end table
  1503. @subsection Examples
  1504. @itemize
  1505. @item
  1506. Halve the input audio volume:
  1507. @example
  1508. volume=volume=0.5
  1509. volume=volume=1/2
  1510. volume=volume=-6.0206dB
  1511. @end example
  1512. In all the above example the named key for @option{volume} can be
  1513. omitted, for example like in:
  1514. @example
  1515. volume=0.5
  1516. @end example
  1517. @item
  1518. Increase input audio power by 6 decibels using fixed-point precision:
  1519. @example
  1520. volume=volume=6dB:precision=fixed
  1521. @end example
  1522. @item
  1523. Fade volume after time 10 with an annihilation period of 5 seconds:
  1524. @example
  1525. volume='if(lt(t,10),1,max(1-(t-10)/5,0))':eval=frame
  1526. @end example
  1527. @end itemize
  1528. @section volumedetect
  1529. Detect the volume of the input video.
  1530. The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
  1531. the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
  1532. In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
  1533. volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
  1534. registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
  1535. the samples).
  1536. All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
  1537. @subsection Examples
  1538. Here is an excerpt of the output:
  1539. @example
  1540. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
  1541. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
  1542. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
  1543. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
  1544. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
  1545. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
  1546. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
  1547. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
  1548. [Parsed_volumedetect_0 @ 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
  1549. @end example
  1550. It means that:
  1551. @itemize
  1552. @item
  1553. The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
  1554. @item
  1555. The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
  1556. @item
  1557. There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
  1558. @end itemize
  1559. In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
  1560. raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
  1561. @c man end AUDIO FILTERS
  1562. @chapter Audio Sources
  1563. @c man begin AUDIO SOURCES
  1564. Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
  1565. @section abuffer
  1566. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  1567. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  1568. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h}.
  1569. It accepts the following parameters:
  1570. @table @option
  1571. @item time_base
  1572. The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
  1573. either a floating-point number or in @var{numerator}/@var{denominator} form.
  1574. @item sample_rate
  1575. The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
  1576. @item sample_fmt
  1577. The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
  1578. Either a sample format name or its corresponging integer representation from
  1579. the enum AVSampleFormat in @file{libavutil/samplefmt.h}
  1580. @item channel_layout
  1581. The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
  1582. Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
  1583. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} or its corresponding integer representation
  1584. from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in @file{libavutil/channel_layout.h}
  1585. @item channels
  1586. The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
  1587. If both @var{channels} and @var{channel_layout} are specified, then they
  1588. must be consistent.
  1589. @end table
  1590. @subsection Examples
  1591. @example
  1592. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
  1593. @end example
  1594. will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
  1595. Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
  1596. 6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
  1597. equivalent to:
  1598. @example
  1599. abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
  1600. @end example
  1601. @section aevalsrc
  1602. Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
  1603. This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
  1604. channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
  1605. audio signal.
  1606. This source accepts the following options:
  1607. @table @option
  1608. @item exprs
  1609. Set the '|'-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
  1610. @option{channel_layout} option is not specified, the selected channel layout
  1611. depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
  1612. specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
  1613. @item channel_layout, c
  1614. Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
  1615. must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
  1616. @item duration, d
  1617. Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See the function
  1618. @code{av_parse_time()} for the accepted format.
  1619. Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
  1620. duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
  1621. complete frame.
  1622. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
  1623. supposed to be generated forever.
  1624. @item nb_samples, n
  1625. Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
  1626. default to 1024.
  1627. @item sample_rate, s
  1628. Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
  1629. @end table
  1630. Each expression in @var{exprs} can contain the following constants:
  1631. @table @option
  1632. @item n
  1633. number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
  1634. @item t
  1635. time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
  1636. @item s
  1637. sample rate
  1638. @end table
  1639. @subsection Examples
  1640. @itemize
  1641. @item
  1642. Generate silence:
  1643. @example
  1644. aevalsrc=0
  1645. @end example
  1646. @item
  1647. Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
  1648. 8000 Hz:
  1649. @example
  1650. aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
  1651. @end example
  1652. @item
  1653. Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
  1654. Center + Back Center) explicitly:
  1655. @example
  1656. aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
  1657. @end example
  1658. @item
  1659. Generate white noise:
  1660. @example
  1661. aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
  1662. @end example
  1663. @item
  1664. Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
  1665. @example
  1666. aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
  1667. @end example
  1668. @item
  1669. Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
  1670. @example
  1671. aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
  1672. @end example
  1673. @end itemize
  1674. @section anullsrc
  1675. The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
  1676. as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
  1677. the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
  1678. synth filter).
  1679. This source accepts the following options:
  1680. @table @option
  1681. @item channel_layout, cl
  1682. Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
  1683. representing a channel layout. The default value of @var{channel_layout}
  1684. is "stereo".
  1685. Check the channel_layout_map definition in
  1686. @file{libavutil/channel_layout.c} for the mapping between strings and
  1687. channel layout values.
  1688. @item sample_rate, r
  1689. Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
  1690. @item nb_samples, n
  1691. Set the number of samples per requested frames.
  1692. @end table
  1693. @subsection Examples
  1694. @itemize
  1695. @item
  1696. Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
  1697. @example
  1698. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=4
  1699. @end example
  1700. @item
  1701. Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
  1702. @example
  1703. anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
  1704. @end example
  1705. @end itemize
  1706. All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
  1707. @section flite
  1708. Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
  1709. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  1710. @code{--enable-libflite}.
  1711. Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
  1712. The filter accepts the following options:
  1713. @table @option
  1714. @item list_voices
  1715. If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
  1716. immediately. Default value is 0.
  1717. @item nb_samples, n
  1718. Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
  1719. @item textfile
  1720. Set the filename containing the text to speak.
  1721. @item text
  1722. Set the text to speak.
  1723. @item voice, v
  1724. Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
  1725. @code{kal}. See also the @var{list_voices} option.
  1726. @end table
  1727. @subsection Examples
  1728. @itemize
  1729. @item
  1730. Read from file @file{speech.txt}, and synthetize the text using the
  1731. standard flite voice:
  1732. @example
  1733. flite=textfile=speech.txt
  1734. @end example
  1735. @item
  1736. Read the specified text selecting the @code{slt} voice:
  1737. @example
  1738. flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1739. @end example
  1740. @item
  1741. Input text to ffmpeg:
  1742. @example
  1743. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
  1744. @end example
  1745. @item
  1746. Make @file{ffplay} speak the specified text, using @code{flite} and
  1747. the @code{lavfi} device:
  1748. @example
  1749. ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
  1750. @end example
  1751. @end itemize
  1752. For more information about libflite, check:
  1753. @url{http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/}
  1754. @section sine
  1755. Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
  1756. The audio signal is bit-exact.
  1757. The filter accepts the following options:
  1758. @table @option
  1759. @item frequency, f
  1760. Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
  1761. @item beep_factor, b
  1762. Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency @var{beep_factor} times
  1763. the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
  1764. @item sample_rate, r
  1765. Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
  1766. @item duration, d
  1767. Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
  1768. @item samples_per_frame
  1769. Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
  1770. @end table
  1771. @subsection Examples
  1772. @itemize
  1773. @item
  1774. Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
  1775. @example
  1776. sine
  1777. @end example
  1778. @item
  1779. Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
  1780. @example
  1781. sine=220:4:d=5
  1782. sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
  1783. sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
  1784. @end example
  1785. @end itemize
  1786. @c man end AUDIO SOURCES
  1787. @chapter Audio Sinks
  1788. @c man begin AUDIO SINKS
  1789. Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
  1790. @section abuffersink
  1791. Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
  1792. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  1793. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  1794. or the options system.
  1795. It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
  1796. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  1797. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  1798. @section anullsink
  1799. Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
  1800. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  1801. tools.
  1802. @c man end AUDIO SINKS
  1803. @chapter Video Filters
  1804. @c man begin VIDEO FILTERS
  1805. When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
  1806. existing filters using @code{--disable-filters}.
  1807. The configure output will show the video filters included in your
  1808. build.
  1809. Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
  1810. @section alphaextract
  1811. Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
  1812. is especially useful with the @var{alphamerge} filter.
  1813. @section alphamerge
  1814. Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
  1815. grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
  1816. @var{alphaextract} to allow the transmission or storage of frame
  1817. sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn't support an alpha
  1818. channel.
  1819. For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
  1820. and a separate video created with @var{alphaextract}, you might use:
  1821. @example
  1822. movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
  1823. @end example
  1824. Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
  1825. sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
  1826. input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
  1827. pipeline drops frames. If you're trying to apply an image as an
  1828. overlay to a video stream, consider the @var{overlay} filter instead.
  1829. @section ass
  1830. Same as the @ref{subtitles} filter, except that it doesn't require libavcodec
  1831. and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
  1832. Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
  1833. @section bbox
  1834. Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
  1835. luminance plane.
  1836. This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
  1837. luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
  1838. The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
  1839. log.
  1840. The filter accepts the following option:
  1841. @table @option
  1842. @item min_val
  1843. Set the minimal luminance value. Default is @code{16}.
  1844. @end table
  1845. @section blackdetect
  1846. Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
  1847. useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
  1848. recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
  1849. duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
  1850. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1851. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1852. The filter accepts the following options:
  1853. @table @option
  1854. @item black_min_duration, d
  1855. Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
  1856. be a non-negative floating point number.
  1857. Default value is 2.0.
  1858. @item picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th
  1859. Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
  1860. Express the minimum value for the ratio:
  1861. @example
  1862. @var{nb_black_pixels} / @var{nb_pixels}
  1863. @end example
  1864. for which a picture is considered black.
  1865. Default value is 0.98.
  1866. @item pixel_black_th, pix_th
  1867. Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
  1868. The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
  1869. pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
  1870. the following equation:
  1871. @example
  1872. @var{absolute_threshold} = @var{luminance_minimum_value} + @var{pixel_black_th} * @var{luminance_range_size}
  1873. @end example
  1874. @var{luminance_range_size} and @var{luminance_minimum_value} depend on
  1875. the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
  1876. formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
  1877. Default value is 0.10.
  1878. @end table
  1879. The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
  1880. value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
  1881. @example
  1882. blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
  1883. @end example
  1884. @section blackframe
  1885. Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
  1886. detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
  1887. the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
  1888. the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
  1889. In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
  1890. least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
  1891. It accepts the following parameters:
  1892. @table @option
  1893. @item amount
  1894. The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
  1895. @code{98}.
  1896. @item threshold, thresh
  1897. The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
  1898. @code{32}.
  1899. @end table
  1900. @section blend
  1901. Blend two video frames into each other.
  1902. It takes two input streams and outputs one stream, the first input is the
  1903. "top" layer and second input is "bottom" layer.
  1904. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
  1905. A description of the accepted options follows.
  1906. @table @option
  1907. @item c0_mode
  1908. @item c1_mode
  1909. @item c2_mode
  1910. @item c3_mode
  1911. @item all_mode
  1912. Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  1913. of @var{all_mode}. Default value is @code{normal}.
  1914. Available values for component modes are:
  1915. @table @samp
  1916. @item addition
  1917. @item and
  1918. @item average
  1919. @item burn
  1920. @item darken
  1921. @item difference
  1922. @item divide
  1923. @item dodge
  1924. @item exclusion
  1925. @item hardlight
  1926. @item lighten
  1927. @item multiply
  1928. @item negation
  1929. @item normal
  1930. @item or
  1931. @item overlay
  1932. @item phoenix
  1933. @item pinlight
  1934. @item reflect
  1935. @item screen
  1936. @item softlight
  1937. @item subtract
  1938. @item vividlight
  1939. @item xor
  1940. @end table
  1941. @item c0_opacity
  1942. @item c1_opacity
  1943. @item c2_opacity
  1944. @item c3_opacity
  1945. @item all_opacity
  1946. Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  1947. of @var{all_opacity}. Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
  1948. @item c0_expr
  1949. @item c1_expr
  1950. @item c2_expr
  1951. @item c3_expr
  1952. @item all_expr
  1953. Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  1954. of @var{all_expr}. Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
  1955. The expressions can use the following variables:
  1956. @table @option
  1957. @item N
  1958. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  1959. @item X
  1960. @item Y
  1961. the coordinates of the current sample
  1962. @item W
  1963. @item H
  1964. the width and height of currently filtered plane
  1965. @item SW
  1966. @item SH
  1967. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  1968. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  1969. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  1970. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  1971. @item T
  1972. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  1973. @item TOP, A
  1974. Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
  1975. @item BOTTOM, B
  1976. Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
  1977. @end table
  1978. @item shortest
  1979. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  1980. @item repeatlast
  1981. Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
  1982. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
  1983. Default is @code{1}.
  1984. @end table
  1985. @subsection Examples
  1986. @itemize
  1987. @item
  1988. Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
  1989. @example
  1990. blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
  1991. @end example
  1992. @item
  1993. Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
  1994. @example
  1995. blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
  1996. @end example
  1997. @item
  1998. Apply uncover left effect:
  1999. @example
  2000. blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
  2001. @end example
  2002. @item
  2003. Apply uncover down effect:
  2004. @example
  2005. blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
  2006. @end example
  2007. @item
  2008. Apply uncover up-left effect:
  2009. @example
  2010. blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
  2011. @end example
  2012. @end itemize
  2013. @section boxblur
  2014. Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
  2015. It accepts the following parameters:
  2016. @table @option
  2017. @item luma_radius, lr
  2018. @item luma_power, lp
  2019. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2020. @item chroma_power, cp
  2021. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2022. @item alpha_power, ap
  2023. @end table
  2024. A description of the accepted options follows.
  2025. @table @option
  2026. @item luma_radius, lr
  2027. @item chroma_radius, cr
  2028. @item alpha_radius, ar
  2029. Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
  2030. corresponding input plane.
  2031. The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
  2032. greater than the value of the expression @code{min(w,h)/2} for the
  2033. luma and alpha planes, and of @code{min(cw,ch)/2} for the chroma
  2034. planes.
  2035. Default value for @option{luma_radius} is "2". If not specified,
  2036. @option{chroma_radius} and @option{alpha_radius} default to the
  2037. corresponding value set for @option{luma_radius}.
  2038. The expressions can contain the following constants:
  2039. @table @option
  2040. @item w
  2041. @item h
  2042. The input width and height in pixels.
  2043. @item cw
  2044. @item ch
  2045. The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
  2046. @item hsub
  2047. @item vsub
  2048. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  2049. pixel format "yuv422p", @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2050. @end table
  2051. @item luma_power, lp
  2052. @item chroma_power, cp
  2053. @item alpha_power, ap
  2054. Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
  2055. corresponding plane.
  2056. Default value for @option{luma_power} is 2. If not specified,
  2057. @option{chroma_power} and @option{alpha_power} default to the
  2058. corresponding value set for @option{luma_power}.
  2059. A value of 0 will disable the effect.
  2060. @end table
  2061. @subsection Examples
  2062. @itemize
  2063. @item
  2064. Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
  2065. set to 2:
  2066. @example
  2067. boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
  2068. boxblur=2:1
  2069. @end example
  2070. @item
  2071. Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
  2072. @example
  2073. boxblur=2:1:cr=0:ar=0
  2074. @end example
  2075. @item
  2076. Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
  2077. @example
  2078. boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
  2079. @end example
  2080. @end itemize
  2081. @section colorbalance
  2082. Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
  2083. The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
  2084. regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
  2085. A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
  2086. value towards the complementary color.
  2087. The filter accepts the following options:
  2088. @table @option
  2089. @item rs
  2090. @item gs
  2091. @item bs
  2092. Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
  2093. @item rm
  2094. @item gm
  2095. @item bm
  2096. Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
  2097. @item rh
  2098. @item gh
  2099. @item bh
  2100. Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
  2101. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-1.0, 1.0]}. Defaults are @code{0}.
  2102. @end table
  2103. @subsection Examples
  2104. @itemize
  2105. @item
  2106. Add red color cast to shadows:
  2107. @example
  2108. colorbalance=rs=.3
  2109. @end example
  2110. @end itemize
  2111. @section colorchannelmixer
  2112. Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
  2113. This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
  2114. the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
  2115. modify is red, the output value will be:
  2116. @example
  2117. @var{red}=@var{red}*@var{rr} + @var{blue}*@var{rb} + @var{green}*@var{rg} + @var{alpha}*@var{ra}
  2118. @end example
  2119. The filter accepts the following options:
  2120. @table @option
  2121. @item rr
  2122. @item rg
  2123. @item rb
  2124. @item ra
  2125. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
  2126. Default is @code{1} for @var{rr}, and @code{0} for @var{rg}, @var{rb} and @var{ra}.
  2127. @item gr
  2128. @item gg
  2129. @item gb
  2130. @item ga
  2131. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
  2132. Default is @code{1} for @var{gg}, and @code{0} for @var{gr}, @var{gb} and @var{ga}.
  2133. @item br
  2134. @item bg
  2135. @item bb
  2136. @item ba
  2137. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
  2138. Default is @code{1} for @var{bb}, and @code{0} for @var{br}, @var{bg} and @var{ba}.
  2139. @item ar
  2140. @item ag
  2141. @item ab
  2142. @item aa
  2143. Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
  2144. Default is @code{1} for @var{aa}, and @code{0} for @var{ar}, @var{ag} and @var{ab}.
  2145. Allowed ranges for options are @code{[-2.0, 2.0]}.
  2146. @end table
  2147. @subsection Examples
  2148. @itemize
  2149. @item
  2150. Convert source to grayscale:
  2151. @example
  2152. colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
  2153. @end example
  2154. @item
  2155. Simulate sepia tones:
  2156. @example
  2157. colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
  2158. @end example
  2159. @end itemize
  2160. @section colormatrix
  2161. Convert color matrix.
  2162. The filter accepts the following options:
  2163. @table @option
  2164. @item src
  2165. @item dst
  2166. Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
  2167. specified.
  2168. The accepted values are:
  2169. @table @samp
  2170. @item bt709
  2171. BT.709
  2172. @item bt601
  2173. BT.601
  2174. @item smpte240m
  2175. SMPTE-240M
  2176. @item fcc
  2177. FCC
  2178. @end table
  2179. @end table
  2180. For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
  2181. @example
  2182. colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
  2183. @end example
  2184. @section copy
  2185. Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
  2186. testing purposes.
  2187. @section crop
  2188. Crop the input video to given dimensions.
  2189. It accepts the following parameters:
  2190. @table @option
  2191. @item w, out_w
  2192. The width of the output video. It defaults to @code{iw}.
  2193. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2194. configuration.
  2195. @item h, out_h
  2196. The height of the output video. It defaults to @code{ih}.
  2197. This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
  2198. configuration.
  2199. @item x
  2200. The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
  2201. video. It defaults to @code{(in_w-out_w)/2}.
  2202. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2203. @item y
  2204. The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
  2205. It defaults to @code{(in_h-out_h)/2}.
  2206. This expression is evaluated per-frame.
  2207. @item keep_aspect
  2208. If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
  2209. to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
  2210. ratio. It defaults to 0.
  2211. @end table
  2212. The @var{out_w}, @var{out_h}, @var{x}, @var{y} parameters are
  2213. expressions containing the following constants:
  2214. @table @option
  2215. @item x
  2216. @item y
  2217. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  2218. each new frame.
  2219. @item in_w
  2220. @item in_h
  2221. The input width and height.
  2222. @item iw
  2223. @item ih
  2224. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  2225. @item out_w
  2226. @item out_h
  2227. The output (cropped) width and height.
  2228. @item ow
  2229. @item oh
  2230. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2231. @item a
  2232. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  2233. @item sar
  2234. input sample aspect ratio
  2235. @item dar
  2236. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  2237. @item hsub
  2238. @item vsub
  2239. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2240. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2241. @item n
  2242. The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  2243. @item pos
  2244. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  2245. @item t
  2246. The timestamp expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  2247. @end table
  2248. The expression for @var{out_w} may depend on the value of @var{out_h},
  2249. and the expression for @var{out_h} may depend on @var{out_w}, but they
  2250. cannot depend on @var{x} and @var{y}, as @var{x} and @var{y} are
  2251. evaluated after @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  2252. The @var{x} and @var{y} parameters specify the expressions for the
  2253. position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
  2254. are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
  2255. is approximated to the nearest valid value.
  2256. The expression for @var{x} may depend on @var{y}, and the expression
  2257. for @var{y} may depend on @var{x}.
  2258. @subsection Examples
  2259. @itemize
  2260. @item
  2261. Crop area with size 100x100 at position (12,34).
  2262. @example
  2263. crop=100:100:12:34
  2264. @end example
  2265. Using named options, the example above becomes:
  2266. @example
  2267. crop=w=100:h=100:x=12:y=34
  2268. @end example
  2269. @item
  2270. Crop the central input area with size 100x100:
  2271. @example
  2272. crop=100:100
  2273. @end example
  2274. @item
  2275. Crop the central input area with size 2/3 of the input video:
  2276. @example
  2277. crop=2/3*in_w:2/3*in_h
  2278. @end example
  2279. @item
  2280. Crop the input video central square:
  2281. @example
  2282. crop=out_w=in_h
  2283. crop=in_h
  2284. @end example
  2285. @item
  2286. Delimit the rectangle with the top-left corner placed at position
  2287. 100:100 and the right-bottom corner corresponding to the right-bottom
  2288. corner of the input image.
  2289. @example
  2290. crop=in_w-100:in_h-100:100:100
  2291. @end example
  2292. @item
  2293. Crop 10 pixels from the left and right borders, and 20 pixels from
  2294. the top and bottom borders
  2295. @example
  2296. crop=in_w-2*10:in_h-2*20
  2297. @end example
  2298. @item
  2299. Keep only the bottom right quarter of the input image:
  2300. @example
  2301. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:in_w/2:in_h/2
  2302. @end example
  2303. @item
  2304. Crop height for getting Greek harmony:
  2305. @example
  2306. crop=in_w:1/PHI*in_w
  2307. @end example
  2308. @item
  2309. Appply trembling effect:
  2310. @example
  2311. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(n/10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(n/7)
  2312. @end example
  2313. @item
  2314. Apply erratic camera effect depending on timestamp:
  2315. @example
  2316. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:(in_w-out_w)/2+((in_w-out_w)/2)*sin(t*10):(in_h-out_h)/2 +((in_h-out_h)/2)*sin(t*13)"
  2317. @end example
  2318. @item
  2319. Set x depending on the value of y:
  2320. @example
  2321. crop=in_w/2:in_h/2:y:10+10*sin(n/10)
  2322. @end example
  2323. @end itemize
  2324. @section cropdetect
  2325. Auto-detect the crop size.
  2326. It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
  2327. recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
  2328. correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
  2329. It accepts the following parameters:
  2330. @table @option
  2331. @item limit
  2332. Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
  2333. from nothing (0) to everything (255). An intensity value greater
  2334. to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
  2335. @item round
  2336. The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
  2337. 16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
  2338. get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
  2339. encoding to most video codecs.
  2340. @item reset_count, reset
  2341. Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
  2342. reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
  2343. detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
  2344. This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
  2345. indicates 'never reset', and returns the largest area encountered during
  2346. playback.
  2347. @end table
  2348. @anchor{curves}
  2349. @section curves
  2350. Apply color adjustments using curves.
  2351. This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
  2352. component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by @var{N} key points
  2353. tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
  2354. values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
  2355. the output frame.
  2356. By default, a component curve is defined by the two points @var{(0;0)} and
  2357. @var{(1;1)}. This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
  2358. "adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
  2359. The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
  2360. curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
  2361. smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
  2362. strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their @var{x} and @var{y} values must
  2363. be in the @var{[0;1]} interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
  2364. the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
  2365. If there is no key point defined in @code{x=0}, the filter will automatically
  2366. insert a @var{(0;0)} point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
  2367. in @code{x=1}, the filter will automatically insert a @var{(1;1)} point.
  2368. The filter accepts the following options:
  2369. @table @option
  2370. @item preset
  2371. Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
  2372. to the @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} parameters; in this case, the later
  2373. options takes priority on the preset values.
  2374. Available presets are:
  2375. @table @samp
  2376. @item none
  2377. @item color_negative
  2378. @item cross_process
  2379. @item darker
  2380. @item increase_contrast
  2381. @item lighter
  2382. @item linear_contrast
  2383. @item medium_contrast
  2384. @item negative
  2385. @item strong_contrast
  2386. @item vintage
  2387. @end table
  2388. Default is @code{none}.
  2389. @item master, m
  2390. Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
  2391. is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
  2392. @option{r}, @option{g}, @option{b} or @option{all} since it acts like a
  2393. post-processing LUT.
  2394. @item red, r
  2395. Set the key points for the red component.
  2396. @item green, g
  2397. Set the key points for the green component.
  2398. @item blue, b
  2399. Set the key points for the blue component.
  2400. @item all
  2401. Set the key points for all components (not including master).
  2402. Can be used in addition to the other key points component
  2403. options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
  2404. @option{all} setting.
  2405. @item psfile
  2406. Specify a Photoshop curves file (@code{.asv}) to import the settings from.
  2407. @end table
  2408. To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
  2409. defined using the following syntax: @code{x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ...}.
  2410. @subsection Examples
  2411. @itemize
  2412. @item
  2413. Increase slightly the middle level of blue:
  2414. @example
  2415. curves=blue='0.5/0.58'
  2416. @end example
  2417. @item
  2418. Vintage effect:
  2419. @example
  2420. curves=r='0/0.11 .42/.51 1/0.95':g='0.50/0.48':b='0/0.22 .49/.44 1/0.8'
  2421. @end example
  2422. Here we obtain the following coordinates for each components:
  2423. @table @var
  2424. @item red
  2425. @code{(0;0.11) (0.42;0.51) (1;0.95)}
  2426. @item green
  2427. @code{(0;0) (0.50;0.48) (1;1)}
  2428. @item blue
  2429. @code{(0;0.22) (0.49;0.44) (1;0.80)}
  2430. @end table
  2431. @item
  2432. The previous example can also be achieved with the associated built-in preset:
  2433. @example
  2434. curves=preset=vintage
  2435. @end example
  2436. @item
  2437. Or simply:
  2438. @example
  2439. curves=vintage
  2440. @end example
  2441. @item
  2442. Use a Photoshop preset and redefine the points of the green component:
  2443. @example
  2444. curves=psfile='MyCurvesPresets/purple.asv':green='0.45/0.53'
  2445. @end example
  2446. @end itemize
  2447. @section dctdnoiz
  2448. Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
  2449. This filter is not designed for real time and can be extremely slow.
  2450. The filter accepts the following options:
  2451. @table @option
  2452. @item sigma, s
  2453. Set the noise sigma constant.
  2454. This @var{sigma} defines a hard threshold of @code{3 * sigma}; every DCT
  2455. coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
  2456. If you need a more advanced filtering, see @option{expr}.
  2457. Default is @code{0}.
  2458. @item overlap
  2459. Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Each block is of size
  2460. @code{16x16}. Since the filter can be slow, you may want to reduce this value,
  2461. at the cost of a less effective filter and the risk of various artefacts.
  2462. If the overlapping value doesn't allow to process the whole input width or
  2463. height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won't be denoised.
  2464. Default value is @code{15}.
  2465. @item expr, e
  2466. Set the coefficient factor expression.
  2467. For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
  2468. multiplier value for the coefficient.
  2469. If this is option is set, the @option{sigma} option will be ignored.
  2470. The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the @var{c}
  2471. variable.
  2472. @end table
  2473. @subsection Examples
  2474. Apply a denoise with a @option{sigma} of @code{4.5}:
  2475. @example
  2476. dctdnoiz=4.5
  2477. @end example
  2478. The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
  2479. @example
  2480. dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
  2481. @end example
  2482. @anchor{decimate}
  2483. @section decimate
  2484. Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
  2485. The filter accepts the following options:
  2486. @table @option
  2487. @item cycle
  2488. Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
  2489. @var{N} means one frame in every batch of @var{N} frames will be dropped.
  2490. Default is @code{5}.
  2491. @item dupthresh
  2492. Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
  2493. is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
  2494. is @code{1.1}
  2495. @item scthresh
  2496. Set scene change threshold. Default is @code{15}.
  2497. @item blockx
  2498. @item blocky
  2499. Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
  2500. Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
  2501. small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is @code{32}.
  2502. @item ppsrc
  2503. Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
  2504. stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
  2505. the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
  2506. @code{1}, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
  2507. stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
  2508. @code{0}.
  2509. @item chroma
  2510. Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
  2511. @code{1}.
  2512. @end table
  2513. @section dejudder
  2514. Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
  2515. Judder can be introduced, for instance, by @ref{pullup} filter. If the original
  2516. source was partially telecined content then the output of @code{pullup,dejudder}
  2517. will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
  2518. container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
  2519. rate video.
  2520. The option available in this filter is:
  2521. @table @option
  2522. @item cycle
  2523. Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
  2524. Accepts any interger greater than 1. Useful values are:
  2525. @table @samp
  2526. @item 4
  2527. If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
  2528. @item 5
  2529. If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
  2530. @item 20
  2531. If a mixture of the two.
  2532. @end table
  2533. The default is @samp{4}.
  2534. @end table
  2535. @section delogo
  2536. Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
  2537. pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
  2538. (and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
  2539. It accepts the following parameters:
  2540. @table @option
  2541. @item x
  2542. @item y
  2543. Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
  2544. specified.
  2545. @item w
  2546. @item h
  2547. Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
  2548. specified.
  2549. @item band, t
  2550. Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
  2551. @var{w} and @var{h}). The default value is 4.
  2552. @item show
  2553. When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
  2554. finding the right @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, and @var{h} parameters.
  2555. The default value is 0.
  2556. The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
  2557. replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
  2558. immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
  2559. compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
  2560. @end table
  2561. @subsection Examples
  2562. @itemize
  2563. @item
  2564. Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
  2565. and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
  2566. @example
  2567. delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
  2568. @end example
  2569. @end itemize
  2570. @section deshake
  2571. Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
  2572. filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
  2573. tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
  2574. The filter accepts the following options:
  2575. @table @option
  2576. @item x
  2577. @item y
  2578. @item w
  2579. @item h
  2580. Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
  2581. vectors.
  2582. If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
  2583. rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
  2584. and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
  2585. filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
  2586. box.
  2587. This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
  2588. might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
  2589. If any or all of @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} are set to -1
  2590. then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
  2591. without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
  2592. Default - search the whole frame.
  2593. @item rx
  2594. @item ry
  2595. Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
  2596. range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
  2597. @item edge
  2598. Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
  2599. frame. Available values are:
  2600. @table @samp
  2601. @item blank, 0
  2602. Fill zeroes at blank locations
  2603. @item original, 1
  2604. Original image at blank locations
  2605. @item clamp, 2
  2606. Extruded edge value at blank locations
  2607. @item mirror, 3
  2608. Mirrored edge at blank locations
  2609. @end table
  2610. Default value is @samp{mirror}.
  2611. @item blocksize
  2612. Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
  2613. default 8.
  2614. @item contrast
  2615. Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
  2616. the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
  2617. pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
  2618. @item search
  2619. Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
  2620. @table @samp
  2621. @item exhaustive, 0
  2622. Set exhaustive search
  2623. @item less, 1
  2624. Set less exhaustive search.
  2625. @end table
  2626. Default value is @samp{exhaustive}.
  2627. @item filename
  2628. If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
  2629. specified file.
  2630. @item opencl
  2631. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  2632. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  2633. @end table
  2634. @section drawbox
  2635. Draw a colored box on the input image.
  2636. It accepts the following parameters:
  2637. @table @option
  2638. @item x
  2639. @item y
  2640. The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
  2641. @item width, w
  2642. @item height, h
  2643. The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
  2644. the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
  2645. @item color, c
  2646. Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
  2647. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2648. value @code{invert} is used, the box edge color is the same as the
  2649. video with inverted luma.
  2650. @item thickness, t
  2651. The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is @code{3}.
  2652. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2653. @end table
  2654. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2655. following constants:
  2656. @table @option
  2657. @item dar
  2658. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2659. @item hsub
  2660. @item vsub
  2661. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2662. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2663. @item in_h, ih
  2664. @item in_w, iw
  2665. The input width and height.
  2666. @item sar
  2667. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2668. @item x
  2669. @item y
  2670. The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
  2671. @item w
  2672. @item h
  2673. The width and height of the drawn box.
  2674. @item t
  2675. The thickness of the drawn box.
  2676. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2677. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2678. @end table
  2679. @subsection Examples
  2680. @itemize
  2681. @item
  2682. Draw a black box around the edge of the input image:
  2683. @example
  2684. drawbox
  2685. @end example
  2686. @item
  2687. Draw a box with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2688. @example
  2689. drawbox=10:20:200:60:red@@0.5
  2690. @end example
  2691. The previous example can be specified as:
  2692. @example
  2693. drawbox=x=10:y=20:w=200:h=60:color=red@@0.5
  2694. @end example
  2695. @item
  2696. Fill the box with pink color:
  2697. @example
  2698. drawbox=x=10:y=10:w=100:h=100:color=pink@@0.5:t=max
  2699. @end example
  2700. @item
  2701. Draw a 2-pixel red 2.40:1 mask:
  2702. @example
  2703. drawbox=x=-t:y=0.5*(ih-iw/2.4)-t:w=iw+t*2:h=iw/2.4+t*2:t=2:c=red
  2704. @end example
  2705. @end itemize
  2706. @section drawgrid
  2707. Draw a grid on the input image.
  2708. It accepts the following parameters:
  2709. @table @option
  2710. @item x
  2711. @item y
  2712. The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
  2713. @item width, w
  2714. @item height, h
  2715. The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
  2716. input width and height, respectively, minus @code{thickness}, so image gets
  2717. framed. Default to 0.
  2718. @item color, c
  2719. Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
  2720. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
  2721. value @code{invert} is used, the grid color is the same as the
  2722. video with inverted luma.
  2723. @item thickness, t
  2724. The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is @code{1}.
  2725. See below for the list of accepted constants.
  2726. @end table
  2727. The parameters for @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w} and @var{h} and @var{t} are expressions containing the
  2728. following constants:
  2729. @table @option
  2730. @item dar
  2731. The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  2732. @item hsub
  2733. @item vsub
  2734. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2735. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2736. @item in_h, ih
  2737. @item in_w, iw
  2738. The input grid cell width and height.
  2739. @item sar
  2740. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2741. @item x
  2742. @item y
  2743. The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
  2744. @item w
  2745. @item h
  2746. The width and height of the drawn cell.
  2747. @item t
  2748. The thickness of the drawn cell.
  2749. These constants allow the @var{x}, @var{y}, @var{w}, @var{h} and @var{t} expressions to refer to
  2750. each other, so you may for example specify @code{y=x/dar} or @code{h=w/dar}.
  2751. @end table
  2752. @subsection Examples
  2753. @itemize
  2754. @item
  2755. Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
  2756. @example
  2757. drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@@0.5
  2758. @end example
  2759. @item
  2760. Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
  2761. @example
  2762. drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@@0.5
  2763. @end example
  2764. @end itemize
  2765. @anchor{drawtext}
  2766. @section drawtext
  2767. Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
  2768. libfreetype library.
  2769. To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
  2770. @code{--enable-libfreetype}.
  2771. To enable default font fallback and the @var{font} option you need to
  2772. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libfontconfig}.
  2773. @subsection Syntax
  2774. It accepts the following parameters:
  2775. @table @option
  2776. @item box
  2777. Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
  2778. The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
  2779. The default value of @var{box} is 0.
  2780. @item boxcolor
  2781. The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
  2782. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2783. The default value of @var{boxcolor} is "white".
  2784. @item borderw
  2785. Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using @var{bordercolor}.
  2786. The default value of @var{borderw} is 0.
  2787. @item bordercolor
  2788. Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
  2789. option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2790. The default value of @var{bordercolor} is "black".
  2791. @item expansion
  2792. Select how the @var{text} is expanded. Can be either @code{none},
  2793. @code{strftime} (deprecated) or
  2794. @code{normal} (default). See the @ref{drawtext_expansion, Text expansion} section
  2795. below for details.
  2796. @item fix_bounds
  2797. If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
  2798. @item fontcolor
  2799. The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
  2800. the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2801. The default value of @var{fontcolor} is "black".
  2802. @item font
  2803. The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
  2804. @item fontfile
  2805. The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
  2806. This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
  2807. @item fontsize
  2808. The font size to be used for drawing text.
  2809. The default value of @var{fontsize} is 16.
  2810. @item ft_load_flags
  2811. The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
  2812. The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
  2813. a combination of the following values:
  2814. @table @var
  2815. @item default
  2816. @item no_scale
  2817. @item no_hinting
  2818. @item render
  2819. @item no_bitmap
  2820. @item vertical_layout
  2821. @item force_autohint
  2822. @item crop_bitmap
  2823. @item pedantic
  2824. @item ignore_global_advance_width
  2825. @item no_recurse
  2826. @item ignore_transform
  2827. @item monochrome
  2828. @item linear_design
  2829. @item no_autohint
  2830. @end table
  2831. Default value is "default".
  2832. For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
  2833. libfreetype flags.
  2834. @item shadowcolor
  2835. The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
  2836. syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  2837. The default value of @var{shadowcolor} is "black".
  2838. @item shadowx
  2839. @item shadowy
  2840. The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
  2841. position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
  2842. values. The default value for both is "0".
  2843. @item start_number
  2844. The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
  2845. is "0".
  2846. @item tabsize
  2847. The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
  2848. Default value is 4.
  2849. @item timecode
  2850. Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
  2851. format. It can be used with or without text parameter. @var{timecode_rate}
  2852. option must be specified.
  2853. @item timecode_rate, rate, r
  2854. Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
  2855. @item text
  2856. The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
  2857. encoded characters.
  2858. This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
  2859. @var{textfile}.
  2860. @item textfile
  2861. A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
  2862. of UTF-8 encoded characters.
  2863. This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
  2864. parameter @var{text}.
  2865. If both @var{text} and @var{textfile} are specified, an error is thrown.
  2866. @item reload
  2867. If set to 1, the @var{textfile} will be reloaded before each frame.
  2868. Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
  2869. @item x
  2870. @item y
  2871. The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
  2872. within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
  2873. output image.
  2874. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is "0".
  2875. See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
  2876. @end table
  2877. The parameters for @var{x} and @var{y} are expressions containing the
  2878. following constants and functions:
  2879. @table @option
  2880. @item dar
  2881. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}
  2882. @item hsub
  2883. @item vsub
  2884. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  2885. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  2886. @item line_h, lh
  2887. the height of each text line
  2888. @item main_h, h, H
  2889. the input height
  2890. @item main_w, w, W
  2891. the input width
  2892. @item max_glyph_a, ascent
  2893. the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
  2894. coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
  2895. glyphs.
  2896. It is a positive value, due to the grid's orientation with the Y axis
  2897. upwards.
  2898. @item max_glyph_d, descent
  2899. the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
  2900. used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
  2901. This is a negative value, due to the grid's orientation, with the Y axis
  2902. upwards.
  2903. @item max_glyph_h
  2904. maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
  2905. contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to @var{ascent} -
  2906. @var{descent}.
  2907. @item max_glyph_w
  2908. maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
  2909. contained in the rendered text
  2910. @item n
  2911. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  2912. @item rand(min, max)
  2913. return a random number included between @var{min} and @var{max}
  2914. @item sar
  2915. The input sample aspect ratio.
  2916. @item t
  2917. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  2918. @item text_h, th
  2919. the height of the rendered text
  2920. @item text_w, tw
  2921. the width of the rendered text
  2922. @item x
  2923. @item y
  2924. the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
  2925. These parameters allow the @var{x} and @var{y} expressions to refer
  2926. each other, so you can for example specify @code{y=x/dar}.
  2927. @end table
  2928. @anchor{drawtext_expansion}
  2929. @subsection Text expansion
  2930. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{strftime},
  2931. the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
  2932. expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
  2933. feature is deprecated.
  2934. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{none}, the text is printed verbatim.
  2935. If @option{expansion} is set to @code{normal} (which is the default),
  2936. the following expansion mechanism is used.
  2937. The backslash character '\', followed by any character, always expands to
  2938. the second character.
  2939. Sequence of the form @code{%@{...@}} are expanded. The text between the
  2940. braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ':'.
  2941. If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (':' or '@}'),
  2942. they should be escaped.
  2943. Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
  2944. @option{text} option in the filter argument string and as the filter
  2945. argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
  2946. that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
  2947. problems.
  2948. The following functions are available:
  2949. @table @command
  2950. @item expr, e
  2951. The expression evaluation result.
  2952. It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
  2953. which accepts the same constants and functions as the @var{x} and
  2954. @var{y} values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
  2955. example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
  2956. the constants @var{text_w} and @var{text_h} will have an undefined
  2957. value.
  2958. @item gmtime
  2959. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
  2960. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  2961. @item localtime
  2962. The time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
  2963. It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
  2964. @item metadata
  2965. Frame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
  2966. @item n, frame_num
  2967. The frame number, starting from 0.
  2968. @item pict_type
  2969. A 1 character description of the current picture type.
  2970. @item pts
  2971. The timestamp of the current frame.
  2972. It can take up to two arguments.
  2973. The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to @code{flt}
  2974. for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; @code{hms} stands
  2975. for a formatted @var{[-]HH:MM:SS.mmm} timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
  2976. The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
  2977. @end table
  2978. @subsection Examples
  2979. @itemize
  2980. @item
  2981. Draw "Test Text" with font FreeSerif, using the default values for the
  2982. optional parameters.
  2983. @example
  2984. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text'"
  2985. @end example
  2986. @item
  2987. Draw 'Test Text' with font FreeSerif of size 24 at position x=100
  2988. and y=50 (counting from the top-left corner of the screen), text is
  2989. yellow with a red box around it. Both the text and the box have an
  2990. opacity of 20%.
  2991. @example
  2992. drawtext="fontfile=/usr/share/fonts/truetype/freefont/FreeSerif.ttf: text='Test Text':\
  2993. x=100: y=50: fontsize=24: fontcolor=yellow@@0.2: box=1: boxcolor=red@@0.2"
  2994. @end example
  2995. Note that the double quotes are not necessary if spaces are not used
  2996. within the parameter list.
  2997. @item
  2998. Show the text at the center of the video frame:
  2999. @example
  3000. drawtext="fontsize=30:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='hello world':x=(w-text_w)/2:y=(h-text_h-line_h)/2"
  3001. @end example
  3002. @item
  3003. Show a text line sliding from right to left in the last row of the video
  3004. frame. The file @file{LONG_LINE} is assumed to contain a single line
  3005. with no newlines.
  3006. @example
  3007. drawtext="fontsize=15:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=LONG_LINE:y=h-line_h:x=-50*t"
  3008. @end example
  3009. @item
  3010. Show the content of file @file{CREDITS} off the bottom of the frame and scroll up.
  3011. @example
  3012. drawtext="fontsize=20:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:textfile=CREDITS:y=h-20*t"
  3013. @end example
  3014. @item
  3015. Draw a single green letter "g", at the center of the input video.
  3016. The glyph baseline is placed at half screen height.
  3017. @example
  3018. drawtext="fontsize=60:fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=green:text=g:x=(w-max_glyph_w)/2:y=h/2-ascent"
  3019. @end example
  3020. @item
  3021. Show text for 1 second every 3 seconds:
  3022. @example
  3023. drawtext="fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:fontcolor=white:x=100:y=x/dar:enable=lt(mod(t\,3)\,1):text='blink'"
  3024. @end example
  3025. @item
  3026. Use fontconfig to set the font. Note that the colons need to be escaped.
  3027. @example
  3028. drawtext='fontfile=Linux Libertine O-40\:style=Semibold:text=FFmpeg'
  3029. @end example
  3030. @item
  3031. Print the date of a real-time encoding (see strftime(3)):
  3032. @example
  3033. drawtext='fontfile=FreeSans.ttf:text=%@{localtime:%a %b %d %Y@}'
  3034. @end example
  3035. @end itemize
  3036. For more information about libfreetype, check:
  3037. @url{http://www.freetype.org/}.
  3038. For more information about fontconfig, check:
  3039. @url{http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html}.
  3040. @section edgedetect
  3041. Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
  3042. The filter accepts the following options:
  3043. @table @option
  3044. @item low
  3045. @item high
  3046. Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
  3047. algorithm.
  3048. The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
  3049. connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
  3050. by the low threshold.
  3051. @var{low} and @var{high} threshold values must be chosen in the range
  3052. [0,1], and @var{low} should be lesser or equal to @var{high}.
  3053. Default value for @var{low} is @code{20/255}, and default value for @var{high}
  3054. is @code{50/255}.
  3055. @item mode
  3056. Define the drawing mode.
  3057. @table @samp
  3058. @item wires
  3059. Draw white/gray wires on black background.
  3060. @item colormix
  3061. Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
  3062. @end table
  3063. Default value is @var{wires}.
  3064. @end table
  3065. @subsection Examples
  3066. @itemize
  3067. @item
  3068. Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
  3069. @example
  3070. edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
  3071. @end example
  3072. @item
  3073. Painting effect without thresholding:
  3074. @example
  3075. edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
  3076. @end example
  3077. @end itemize
  3078. @section extractplanes
  3079. Extract color channel components from input video stream into
  3080. separate grayscale video streams.
  3081. The filter accepts the following option:
  3082. @table @option
  3083. @item planes
  3084. Set plane(s) to extract.
  3085. Available values for planes are:
  3086. @table @samp
  3087. @item y
  3088. @item u
  3089. @item v
  3090. @item a
  3091. @item r
  3092. @item g
  3093. @item b
  3094. @end table
  3095. Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
  3096. That means you cannot select @code{r}, @code{g}, @code{b} planes
  3097. with @code{y}, @code{u}, @code{v} planes at same time.
  3098. @end table
  3099. @subsection Examples
  3100. @itemize
  3101. @item
  3102. Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
  3103. into 3 grayscale outputs:
  3104. @example
  3105. ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
  3106. @end example
  3107. @end itemize
  3108. @section elbg
  3109. Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
  3110. For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
  3111. the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
  3112. of distinct output colors.
  3113. This filter accepts the following options.
  3114. @table @option
  3115. @item codebook_length, l
  3116. Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
  3117. represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
  3118. @item nb_steps, n
  3119. Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
  3120. mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
  3121. computation time. Default value is 1.
  3122. @item seed, s
  3123. Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
  3124. UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
  3125. will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
  3126. @end table
  3127. @section fade
  3128. Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
  3129. It accepts the following parameters:
  3130. @table @option
  3131. @item type, t
  3132. The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
  3133. effect.
  3134. Default is @code{in}.
  3135. @item start_frame, s
  3136. Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
  3137. effect at. Default is 0.
  3138. @item nb_frames, n
  3139. The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
  3140. fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
  3141. At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
  3142. selected @option{color}.
  3143. Default is 25.
  3144. @item alpha
  3145. If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
  3146. Default value is 0.
  3147. @item start_time, st
  3148. Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
  3149. effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
  3150. whichever comes last. Default is 0.
  3151. @item duration, d
  3152. The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
  3153. fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
  3154. at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
  3155. selected @option{color}.
  3156. If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
  3157. @item color, c
  3158. Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
  3159. @end table
  3160. @subsection Examples
  3161. @itemize
  3162. @item
  3163. Fade in the first 30 frames of video:
  3164. @example
  3165. fade=in:0:30
  3166. @end example
  3167. The command above is equivalent to:
  3168. @example
  3169. fade=t=in:s=0:n=30
  3170. @end example
  3171. @item
  3172. Fade out the last 45 frames of a 200-frame video:
  3173. @example
  3174. fade=out:155:45
  3175. fade=type=out:start_frame=155:nb_frames=45
  3176. @end example
  3177. @item
  3178. Fade in the first 25 frames and fade out the last 25 frames of a 1000-frame video:
  3179. @example
  3180. fade=in:0:25, fade=out:975:25
  3181. @end example
  3182. @item
  3183. Make the first 5 frames yellow, then fade in from frame 5-24:
  3184. @example
  3185. fade=in:5:20:color=yellow
  3186. @end example
  3187. @item
  3188. Fade in alpha over first 25 frames of video:
  3189. @example
  3190. fade=in:0:25:alpha=1
  3191. @end example
  3192. @item
  3193. Make the first 5.5 seconds black, then fade in for 0.5 seconds:
  3194. @example
  3195. fade=t=in:st=5.5:d=0.5
  3196. @end example
  3197. @end itemize
  3198. @section field
  3199. Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
  3200. arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
  3201. non-interlaced.
  3202. The filter accepts the following options:
  3203. @table @option
  3204. @item type
  3205. Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is @code{0} or
  3206. @code{top}) or the bottom field (if the value is @code{1} or
  3207. @code{bottom}).
  3208. @end table
  3209. @section fieldmatch
  3210. Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
  3211. progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
  3212. frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine @code{fieldmatch} needs to be
  3213. followed by a decimation filter such as @ref{decimate} in the filtergraph.
  3214. The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
  3215. the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
  3216. If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
  3217. @code{fieldmatch} will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
  3218. But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
  3219. de-interlaced by a later filter such as @ref{yadif} before decimation.
  3220. In addition to the various configuration options, @code{fieldmatch} can take an
  3221. optional second stream, activated through the @option{ppsrc} option. If
  3222. enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
  3223. this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
  3224. help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
  3225. (assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
  3226. or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
  3227. Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
  3228. and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
  3229. which @code{fieldmatch} is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
  3230. close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
  3231. The filter accepts the following options:
  3232. @table @option
  3233. @item order
  3234. Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
  3235. @table @samp
  3236. @item auto
  3237. Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg's internal parity value).
  3238. @item bff
  3239. Assume bottom field first.
  3240. @item tff
  3241. Assume top field first.
  3242. @end table
  3243. Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
  3244. stream.
  3245. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3246. @item mode
  3247. Set the matching mode or strategy to use. @option{pc} mode is the safest in the
  3248. sense that it won't risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
  3249. possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
  3250. outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
  3251. hand, @option{pcn_ub} mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
  3252. but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
  3253. all somewhere in between @option{pc} and @option{pcn_ub} in terms of risking
  3254. jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
  3255. with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
  3256. More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in @ref{p/c/n/u/b meaning} section.
  3257. Available values are:
  3258. @table @samp
  3259. @item pc
  3260. 2-way matching (p/c)
  3261. @item pc_n
  3262. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
  3263. @item pc_u
  3264. 2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
  3265. @item pc_n_ub
  3266. 2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
  3267. still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
  3268. @item pcn
  3269. 3-way matching (p/c/n)
  3270. @item pcn_ub
  3271. 3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
  3272. detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
  3273. @end table
  3274. The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
  3275. mode assuming @option{order}=@var{tff} (and @option{field} on @var{auto} or
  3276. @var{top}).
  3277. In terms of speed @option{pc} mode is by far the fastest and @option{pcn_ub} is
  3278. the slowest.
  3279. Default value is @var{pc_n}.
  3280. @item ppsrc
  3281. Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
  3282. input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
  3283. introduction for more details. It is similar to the @option{clip2} feature from
  3284. VFM/TFM.
  3285. Default value is @code{0} (disabled).
  3286. @item field
  3287. Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
  3288. @option{order} unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
  3289. certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
  3290. large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
  3291. @table @samp
  3292. @item auto
  3293. Automatic (same value as @option{order}).
  3294. @item bottom
  3295. Match from the bottom field.
  3296. @item top
  3297. Match from the top field.
  3298. @end table
  3299. Default value is @var{auto}.
  3300. @item mchroma
  3301. Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
  3302. cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to @code{0}
  3303. only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
  3304. artifacts. Setting this to @code{0} could also be used to speed things up at
  3305. the cost of some accuracy.
  3306. Default value is @code{1}.
  3307. @item y0
  3308. @item y1
  3309. These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between @option{y0} and
  3310. @option{y1} from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
  3311. band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
  3312. interfere with the matching. @option{y0} sets the starting scan line and
  3313. @option{y1} sets the ending line; all lines in between @option{y0} and
  3314. @option{y1} (including @option{y0} and @option{y1}) will be ignored. Setting
  3315. @option{y0} and @option{y1} to the same value will disable the feature.
  3316. @option{y0} and @option{y1} defaults to @code{0}.
  3317. @item scthresh
  3318. Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
  3319. the luma plane. Good values are in the @code{[8.0, 14.0]} range. Scene change
  3320. detection is only relevant in case @option{combmatch}=@var{sc}. The range for
  3321. @option{scthresh} is @code{[0.0, 100.0]}.
  3322. Default value is @code{12.0}.
  3323. @item combmatch
  3324. When @option{combatch} is not @var{none}, @code{fieldmatch} will take into
  3325. account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
  3326. final match. Available values are:
  3327. @table @samp
  3328. @item none
  3329. No final matching based on combed scores.
  3330. @item sc
  3331. Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
  3332. @item full
  3333. Use combed scores all the time.
  3334. @end table
  3335. Default is @var{sc}.
  3336. @item combdbg
  3337. Force @code{fieldmatch} to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
  3338. print them. This setting is known as @option{micout} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3339. Available values are:
  3340. @table @samp
  3341. @item none
  3342. No forced calculation.
  3343. @item pcn
  3344. Force p/c/n calculations.
  3345. @item pcnub
  3346. Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
  3347. @end table
  3348. Default value is @var{none}.
  3349. @item cthresh
  3350. This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
  3351. essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
  3352. Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
  3353. can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
  3354. @code{-1} (every pixel will be detected as combed) to @code{255} (no pixel will
  3355. be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
  3356. range is @code{[8, 12]}.
  3357. Default value is @code{9}.
  3358. @item chroma
  3359. Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
  3360. disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
  3361. causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
  3362. using @option{chroma}=@var{0} is usually more reliable, except for the case
  3363. where there is chroma only combing in the source.
  3364. Default value is @code{0}.
  3365. @item blockx
  3366. @item blocky
  3367. Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
  3368. frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
  3369. @option{combpel} pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
  3370. declared combed. See the @option{combpel} parameter description for more info.
  3371. Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
  3372. to 512.
  3373. Default value is @code{16}.
  3374. @item combpel
  3375. The number of combed pixels inside any of the @option{blocky} by
  3376. @option{blockx} size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
  3377. combed. While @option{cthresh} controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
  3378. setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
  3379. window defined by the @option{blockx} and @option{blocky} settings) on the
  3380. frame. Minimum value is @code{0} and maximum is @code{blocky x blockx} (at
  3381. which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
  3382. as @option{MI} in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
  3383. Default value is @code{80}.
  3384. @end table
  3385. @anchor{p/c/n/u/b meaning}
  3386. @subsection p/c/n/u/b meaning
  3387. @subsubsection p/c/n
  3388. We assume the following telecined stream:
  3389. @example
  3390. Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
  3391. Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
  3392. @end example
  3393. The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
  3394. first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
  3395. When @code{fieldmatch} is configured to run a matching from bottom
  3396. (@option{field}=@var{bottom}) this is how this input stream get transformed:
  3397. @example
  3398. Input stream:
  3399. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3400. B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
  3401. Matches: c c n n c
  3402. Output stream:
  3403. T 1 2 3 4 4
  3404. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3405. @end example
  3406. As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
  3407. To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
  3408. after this operation. See for instance the @ref{decimate} filter.
  3409. The same operation now matching from top fields (@option{field}=@var{top})
  3410. looks like this:
  3411. @example
  3412. Input stream:
  3413. T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
  3414. B 1 2 3 4 4
  3415. Matches: c c p p c
  3416. Output stream:
  3417. T 1 2 2 3 4
  3418. B 1 2 2 3 4
  3419. @end example
  3420. In these examples, we can see what @var{p}, @var{c} and @var{n} mean;
  3421. basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
  3422. @itemize
  3423. @item @var{p} matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
  3424. @item @var{c} matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
  3425. @item @var{n} matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
  3426. @end itemize
  3427. @subsubsection u/b
  3428. The @var{u} and @var{b} matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
  3429. from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
  3430. currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
  3431. 'x' is placed above and below each matched fields.
  3432. With bottom matching (@option{field}=@var{bottom}):
  3433. @example
  3434. Match: c p n b u
  3435. x x x x x
  3436. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3437. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3438. x x x x x
  3439. Output frames:
  3440. 2 1 2 2 2
  3441. 2 2 2 1 3
  3442. @end example
  3443. With top matching (@option{field}=@var{top}):
  3444. @example
  3445. Match: c p n b u
  3446. x x x x x
  3447. Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
  3448. Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
  3449. x x x x x
  3450. Output frames:
  3451. 2 2 2 1 2
  3452. 2 1 3 2 2
  3453. @end example
  3454. @subsection Examples
  3455. Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
  3456. @example
  3457. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
  3458. @end example
  3459. Advanced IVTC, with fallback on @ref{yadif} for still combed frames:
  3460. @example
  3461. fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
  3462. @end example
  3463. @section fieldorder
  3464. Transform the field order of the input video.
  3465. It accepts the following parameters:
  3466. @table @option
  3467. @item order
  3468. The output field order. Valid values are @var{tff} for top field first or @var{bff}
  3469. for bottom field first.
  3470. @end table
  3471. The default value is @samp{tff}.
  3472. The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
  3473. by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
  3474. This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
  3475. If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
  3476. flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
  3477. not alter the incoming video.
  3478. It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
  3479. which is bottom field first.
  3480. For example:
  3481. @example
  3482. ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
  3483. @end example
  3484. @section fifo
  3485. Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
  3486. It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
  3487. framework.
  3488. It does not take parameters.
  3489. @anchor{format}
  3490. @section format
  3491. Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
  3492. Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
  3493. the next filter.
  3494. It accepts the following parameters:
  3495. @table @option
  3496. @item pix_fmts
  3497. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  3498. "pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  3499. @end table
  3500. @subsection Examples
  3501. @itemize
  3502. @item
  3503. Convert the input video to the @var{yuv420p} format
  3504. @example
  3505. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p
  3506. @end example
  3507. Convert the input video to any of the formats in the list
  3508. @example
  3509. format=pix_fmts=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  3510. @end example
  3511. @end itemize
  3512. @anchor{fps}
  3513. @section fps
  3514. Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
  3515. frames as necessary.
  3516. It accepts the following parameters:
  3517. @table @option
  3518. @item fps
  3519. The desired output frame rate. The default is @code{25}.
  3520. @item round
  3521. Rounding method.
  3522. Possible values are:
  3523. @table @option
  3524. @item zero
  3525. zero round towards 0
  3526. @item inf
  3527. round away from 0
  3528. @item down
  3529. round towards -infinity
  3530. @item up
  3531. round towards +infinity
  3532. @item near
  3533. round to nearest
  3534. @end table
  3535. The default is @code{near}.
  3536. @item start_time
  3537. Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
  3538. padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
  3539. about the first frame's expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
  3540. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
  3541. the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
  3542. frames with a negative PTS.
  3543. @end table
  3544. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3545. @var{fps}[:@var{round}].
  3546. See also the @ref{setpts} filter.
  3547. @subsection Examples
  3548. @itemize
  3549. @item
  3550. A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
  3551. @example
  3552. fps=fps=25
  3553. @end example
  3554. @item
  3555. Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
  3556. @example
  3557. fps=fps=film:round=near
  3558. @end example
  3559. @end itemize
  3560. @section framepack
  3561. Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
  3562. metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
  3563. framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
  3564. that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the @ref{scale} and
  3565. @ref{fps} filters.
  3566. It accepts the following parameters:
  3567. @table @option
  3568. @item format
  3569. The desired packing format. Supported values are:
  3570. @table @option
  3571. @item sbs
  3572. The views are next to each other (default).
  3573. @item tab
  3574. The views are on top of each other.
  3575. @item lines
  3576. The views are packed by line.
  3577. @item columns
  3578. The views are packed by column.
  3579. @item frameseq
  3580. The views are temporally interleaved.
  3581. @end table
  3582. @end table
  3583. Some examples:
  3584. @example
  3585. # Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
  3586. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
  3587. # Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
  3588. ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
  3589. @end example
  3590. @section framestep
  3591. Select one frame every N-th frame.
  3592. This filter accepts the following option:
  3593. @table @option
  3594. @item step
  3595. Select frame after every @code{step} frames.
  3596. Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is @code{1}.
  3597. @end table
  3598. @anchor{frei0r}
  3599. @section frei0r
  3600. Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
  3601. To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
  3602. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  3603. It accepts the following parameters:
  3604. @table @option
  3605. @item filter_name
  3606. The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
  3607. @env{FREI0R_PATH} is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
  3608. directories specified by the colon-separated list in @env{FREIOR_PATH}.
  3609. Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
  3610. @file{HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/}, @file{/usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/},
  3611. @file{/usr/lib/frei0r-1/}.
  3612. @item filter_params
  3613. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
  3614. @end table
  3615. A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
  3616. "y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
  3617. @var{R}/@var{G}/@var{B}, where @var{R}, @var{G}, and @var{B} are floating point
  3618. numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
  3619. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as @var{X}/@var{Y}, where
  3620. @var{X} and @var{Y} are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
  3621. The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
  3622. effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
  3623. @subsection Examples
  3624. @itemize
  3625. @item
  3626. Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
  3627. @example
  3628. frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
  3629. @end example
  3630. @item
  3631. Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
  3632. @example
  3633. frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
  3634. frei0r=colordistance:violet
  3635. frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
  3636. @end example
  3637. @item
  3638. Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
  3639. positions:
  3640. @example
  3641. frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
  3642. @end example
  3643. @end itemize
  3644. For more information, see
  3645. @url{http://frei0r.dyne.org}
  3646. @section geq
  3647. The filter accepts the following options:
  3648. @table @option
  3649. @item lum_expr, lum
  3650. Set the luminance expression.
  3651. @item cb_expr, cb
  3652. Set the chrominance blue expression.
  3653. @item cr_expr, cr
  3654. Set the chrominance red expression.
  3655. @item alpha_expr, a
  3656. Set the alpha expression.
  3657. @item red_expr, r
  3658. Set the red expression.
  3659. @item green_expr, g
  3660. Set the green expression.
  3661. @item blue_expr, b
  3662. Set the blue expression.
  3663. @end table
  3664. The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
  3665. of the @option{lum_expr}, @option{cb_expr}, or @option{cr_expr}
  3666. options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
  3667. colorspace. If one of the @option{red_expr}, @option{green_expr}, or
  3668. @option{blue_expr} options is specified, it will select an RGB
  3669. colorspace.
  3670. If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
  3671. one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
  3672. If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
  3673. to the luminance expression.
  3674. The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
  3675. @table @option
  3676. @item N
  3677. The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from @code{0}.
  3678. @item X
  3679. @item Y
  3680. The coordinates of the current sample.
  3681. @item W
  3682. @item H
  3683. The width and height of the image.
  3684. @item SW
  3685. @item SH
  3686. Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
  3687. ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
  3688. plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are @code{1,1} for the luma plane, and
  3689. @code{0.5,0.5} for chroma planes.
  3690. @item T
  3691. Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
  3692. @item p(x, y)
  3693. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the current
  3694. plane.
  3695. @item lum(x, y)
  3696. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the luminance
  3697. plane.
  3698. @item cb(x, y)
  3699. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3700. blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3701. @item cr(x, y)
  3702. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3703. red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3704. @item r(x, y)
  3705. @item g(x, y)
  3706. @item b(x, y)
  3707. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the
  3708. red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
  3709. @item alpha(x, y)
  3710. Return the value of the pixel at location (@var{x},@var{y}) of the alpha
  3711. plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
  3712. @end table
  3713. For functions, if @var{x} and @var{y} are outside the area, the value will be
  3714. automatically clipped to the closer edge.
  3715. @subsection Examples
  3716. @itemize
  3717. @item
  3718. Flip the image horizontally:
  3719. @example
  3720. geq=p(W-X\,Y)
  3721. @end example
  3722. @item
  3723. Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle @code{PI/3} and a
  3724. wavelength of 100 pixels:
  3725. @example
  3726. geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
  3727. @end example
  3728. @item
  3729. Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
  3730. @example
  3731. nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
  3732. @end example
  3733. @item
  3734. Generate a quick emboss effect:
  3735. @example
  3736. format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
  3737. @end example
  3738. @item
  3739. Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
  3740. @example
  3741. geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
  3742. @end example
  3743. @end itemize
  3744. @section gradfun
  3745. Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
  3746. regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
  3747. Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
  3748. dither them.
  3749. It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
  3750. lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
  3751. bring back the bands.
  3752. It accepts the following parameters:
  3753. @table @option
  3754. @item strength
  3755. The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
  3756. the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
  3757. .51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
  3758. valid range.
  3759. @item radius
  3760. The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
  3761. gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
  3762. regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
  3763. values will be clipped to the valid range.
  3764. @end table
  3765. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
  3766. @var{strength}[:@var{radius}]
  3767. @subsection Examples
  3768. @itemize
  3769. @item
  3770. Apply the filter with a @code{3.5} strength and radius of @code{8}:
  3771. @example
  3772. gradfun=3.5:8
  3773. @end example
  3774. @item
  3775. Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
  3776. value):
  3777. @example
  3778. gradfun=radius=8
  3779. @end example
  3780. @end itemize
  3781. @anchor{haldclut}
  3782. @section haldclut
  3783. Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
  3784. First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
  3785. The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
  3786. The filter accepts the following options:
  3787. @table @option
  3788. @item shortest
  3789. Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is @code{0}.
  3790. @item repeatlast
  3791. Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
  3792. @code{0} disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
  3793. Default is @code{1}.
  3794. @end table
  3795. @code{haldclut} also has the same interpolation options as @ref{lut3d} (both
  3796. filters share the same internals).
  3797. More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg's website
  3798. (Hald CLUT author) at @url{http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html}.
  3799. @subsection Workflow examples
  3800. @subsubsection Hald CLUT video stream
  3801. Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
  3802. @example
  3803. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
  3804. @end example
  3805. Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
  3806. Then use it with @code{haldclut} to apply it on some random stream:
  3807. @example
  3808. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
  3809. @end example
  3810. The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
  3811. @file{clut.nut}), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
  3812. to the remaining frames of the @code{mandelbrot} stream.
  3813. @subsubsection Hald CLUT with preview
  3814. A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of @code{Level*Level*Level} by
  3815. @code{Level*Level*Level} pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
  3816. biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
  3817. padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
  3818. a preview of the Hald CLUT.
  3819. Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
  3820. @code{haldclut} filter:
  3821. @example
  3822. ffmpeg -f lavfi -i @ref{haldclutsrc}=8 -vf "
  3823. pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
  3824. smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
  3825. [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
  3826. [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
  3827. @end example
  3828. It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
  3829. bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
  3830. the color changes.
  3831. Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
  3832. @example
  3833. ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
  3834. @end example
  3835. @section hflip
  3836. Flip the input video horizontally.
  3837. For example, to horizontally flip the input video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  3838. @example
  3839. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
  3840. @end example
  3841. @section histeq
  3842. This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
  3843. per-frame basis.
  3844. It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
  3845. intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
  3846. equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
  3847. viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
  3848. useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
  3849. video.
  3850. The filter accepts the following options:
  3851. @table @option
  3852. @item strength
  3853. Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
  3854. is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
  3855. approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
  3856. in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
  3857. @item intensity
  3858. Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
  3859. values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
  3860. the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
  3861. must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
  3862. @item antibanding
  3863. Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
  3864. the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
  3865. the histogram. Possible values are @code{none}, @code{weak} or
  3866. @code{strong}. It defaults to @code{none}.
  3867. @end table
  3868. @section histogram
  3869. Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
  3870. The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
  3871. distribution in an image.
  3872. The filter accepts the following options:
  3873. @table @option
  3874. @item mode
  3875. Set histogram mode.
  3876. It accepts the following values:
  3877. @table @samp
  3878. @item levels
  3879. Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
  3880. image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
  3881. the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
  3882. current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
  3883. @item color
  3884. Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
  3885. graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
  3886. vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
  3887. (i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
  3888. the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
  3889. side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
  3890. with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
  3891. The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
  3892. a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
  3893. (color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
  3894. the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
  3895. square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
  3896. color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
  3897. colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
  3898. the edge of the square.
  3899. @item color2
  3900. Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as @code{color} but actual chroma values
  3901. are displayed.
  3902. @item waveform
  3903. Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
  3904. represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
  3905. In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
  3906. side represents value = 255.
  3907. @end table
  3908. Default value is @code{levels}.
  3909. @item level_height
  3910. Set height of level in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{200}.
  3911. Allowed range is [50, 2048].
  3912. @item scale_height
  3913. Set height of color scale in @code{levels}. Default value is @code{12}.
  3914. Allowed range is [0, 40].
  3915. @item step
  3916. Set step for @code{waveform} mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
  3917. many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
  3918. Default value is @code{10}. Allowed range is [1, 255].
  3919. @item waveform_mode
  3920. Set mode for @code{waveform}. Can be either @code{row}, or @code{column}.
  3921. Default is @code{row}.
  3922. @item waveform_mirror
  3923. Set mirroring mode for @code{waveform}. @code{0} means unmirrored, @code{1}
  3924. means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
  3925. side for @code{row} mode and at the top for @code{column} mode. Default is
  3926. @code{0} (unmirrored).
  3927. @item display_mode
  3928. Set display mode for @code{waveform} and @code{levels}.
  3929. It accepts the following values:
  3930. @table @samp
  3931. @item parade
  3932. Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
  3933. @code{row} waveform mode or one below the other in @code{column} waveform mode
  3934. for @code{waveform} histogram mode. For @code{levels} histogram mode,
  3935. per color component graphs are placed below each other.
  3936. Using this display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easy to
  3937. spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
  3938. contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
  3939. grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
  3940. and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
  3941. roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
  3942. making level adjustments the three waveforms.
  3943. @item overlay
  3944. Presents information identical to that in the @code{parade}, except
  3945. that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
  3946. over one another.
  3947. This display mode in @code{waveform} histogram mode makes it easier to spot
  3948. relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
  3949. components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
  3950. or blacks.
  3951. @end table
  3952. Default is @code{parade}.
  3953. @item levels_mode
  3954. Set mode for @code{levels}. Can be either @code{linear}, or @code{logarithmic}.
  3955. Default is @code{linear}.
  3956. @end table
  3957. @subsection Examples
  3958. @itemize
  3959. @item
  3960. Calculate and draw histogram:
  3961. @example
  3962. ffplay -i input -vf histogram
  3963. @end example
  3964. @end itemize
  3965. @anchor{hqdn3d}
  3966. @section hqdn3d
  3967. This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
  3968. image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
  3969. still. It should enhance compressibility.
  3970. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  3971. @table @option
  3972. @item luma_spatial
  3973. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
  3974. It defaults to 4.0.
  3975. @item chroma_spatial
  3976. A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
  3977. It defaults to 3.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  3978. @item luma_tmp
  3979. A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
  3980. 6.0*@var{luma_spatial}/4.0.
  3981. @item chroma_tmp
  3982. A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
  3983. @var{luma_tmp}*@var{chroma_spatial}/@var{luma_spatial}.
  3984. @end table
  3985. @section hue
  3986. Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
  3987. It accepts the following parameters:
  3988. @table @option
  3989. @item h
  3990. Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
  3991. and defaults to "0".
  3992. @item s
  3993. Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  3994. defaults to "1".
  3995. @item H
  3996. Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
  3997. expression, and defaults to "0".
  3998. @item b
  3999. Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
  4000. defaults to "0".
  4001. @end table
  4002. @option{h} and @option{H} are mutually exclusive, and can't be
  4003. specified at the same time.
  4004. The @option{b}, @option{h}, @option{H} and @option{s} option values are
  4005. expressions containing the following constants:
  4006. @table @option
  4007. @item n
  4008. frame count of the input frame starting from 0
  4009. @item pts
  4010. presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
  4011. @item r
  4012. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  4013. @item t
  4014. timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
  4015. @item tb
  4016. time base of the input video
  4017. @end table
  4018. @subsection Examples
  4019. @itemize
  4020. @item
  4021. Set the hue to 90 degrees and the saturation to 1.0:
  4022. @example
  4023. hue=h=90:s=1
  4024. @end example
  4025. @item
  4026. Same command but expressing the hue in radians:
  4027. @example
  4028. hue=H=PI/2:s=1
  4029. @end example
  4030. @item
  4031. Rotate hue and make the saturation swing between 0
  4032. and 2 over a period of 1 second:
  4033. @example
  4034. hue="H=2*PI*t: s=sin(2*PI*t)+1"
  4035. @end example
  4036. @item
  4037. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-in effect starting at 0:
  4038. @example
  4039. hue="s=min(t/3\,1)"
  4040. @end example
  4041. The general fade-in expression can be written as:
  4042. @example
  4043. hue="s=min(0\, max((t-START)/DURATION\, 1))"
  4044. @end example
  4045. @item
  4046. Apply a 3 seconds saturation fade-out effect starting at 5 seconds:
  4047. @example
  4048. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (8-t)/3))"
  4049. @end example
  4050. The general fade-out expression can be written as:
  4051. @example
  4052. hue="s=max(0\, min(1\, (START+DURATION-t)/DURATION))"
  4053. @end example
  4054. @end itemize
  4055. @subsection Commands
  4056. This filter supports the following commands:
  4057. @table @option
  4058. @item b
  4059. @item s
  4060. @item h
  4061. @item H
  4062. Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
  4063. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4064. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4065. value.
  4066. @end table
  4067. @section idet
  4068. Detect video interlacing type.
  4069. This filter tries to detect if the input is interlaced or progressive,
  4070. top or bottom field first.
  4071. The filter accepts the following options:
  4072. @table @option
  4073. @item intl_thres
  4074. Set interlacing threshold.
  4075. @item prog_thres
  4076. Set progressive threshold.
  4077. @end table
  4078. @section il
  4079. Deinterleave or interleave fields.
  4080. This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
  4081. deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
  4082. fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
  4083. half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
  4084. You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
  4085. The filter accepts the following options:
  4086. @table @option
  4087. @item luma_mode, l
  4088. @item chroma_mode, c
  4089. @item alpha_mode, a
  4090. Available values for @var{luma_mode}, @var{chroma_mode} and
  4091. @var{alpha_mode} are:
  4092. @table @samp
  4093. @item none
  4094. Do nothing.
  4095. @item deinterleave, d
  4096. Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
  4097. @item interleave, i
  4098. Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
  4099. @end table
  4100. Default value is @code{none}.
  4101. @item luma_swap, ls
  4102. @item chroma_swap, cs
  4103. @item alpha_swap, as
  4104. Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is @code{0}.
  4105. @end table
  4106. @section interlace
  4107. Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
  4108. lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
  4109. halving the frame rate and preserving image height. A vertical lowpass filter
  4110. is always applied in order to avoid twitter effects and reduce moiré patterns.
  4111. @example
  4112. Original Original New Frame
  4113. Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
  4114. ========== =========== ==================
  4115. Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
  4116. Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
  4117. Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
  4118. Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
  4119. ... ... ...
  4120. New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
  4121. @end example
  4122. It accepts the following optional parameters:
  4123. @table @option
  4124. @item scan
  4125. This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
  4126. (tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
  4127. @end table
  4128. @section kerndeint
  4129. Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft's adaptive kernel
  4130. deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
  4131. progressive frames.
  4132. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4133. @table @option
  4134. @item thresh
  4135. Set the threshold which affects the filter's tolerance when
  4136. determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
  4137. in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
  4138. applying the process on every pixels.
  4139. @item map
  4140. Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
  4141. Default is 0.
  4142. @item order
  4143. Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
  4144. 0. Default is 0.
  4145. @item sharp
  4146. Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4147. @item twoway
  4148. Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
  4149. @end table
  4150. @subsection Examples
  4151. @itemize
  4152. @item
  4153. Apply default values:
  4154. @example
  4155. kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
  4156. @end example
  4157. @item
  4158. Enable additional sharpening:
  4159. @example
  4160. kerndeint=sharp=1
  4161. @end example
  4162. @item
  4163. Paint processed pixels in white:
  4164. @example
  4165. kerndeint=map=1
  4166. @end example
  4167. @end itemize
  4168. @anchor{lut3d}
  4169. @section lut3d
  4170. Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
  4171. The filter accepts the following options:
  4172. @table @option
  4173. @item file
  4174. Set the 3D LUT file name.
  4175. Currently supported formats:
  4176. @table @samp
  4177. @item 3dl
  4178. AfterEffects
  4179. @item cube
  4180. Iridas
  4181. @item dat
  4182. DaVinci
  4183. @item m3d
  4184. Pandora
  4185. @end table
  4186. @item interp
  4187. Select interpolation mode.
  4188. Available values are:
  4189. @table @samp
  4190. @item nearest
  4191. Use values from the nearest defined point.
  4192. @item trilinear
  4193. Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
  4194. @item tetrahedral
  4195. Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
  4196. @end table
  4197. @end table
  4198. @section lut, lutrgb, lutyuv
  4199. Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
  4200. to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
  4201. @var{lutyuv} applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, @var{lutrgb}
  4202. to an RGB input video.
  4203. These filters accept the following parameters:
  4204. @table @option
  4205. @item c0
  4206. set first pixel component expression
  4207. @item c1
  4208. set second pixel component expression
  4209. @item c2
  4210. set third pixel component expression
  4211. @item c3
  4212. set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
  4213. @item r
  4214. set red component expression
  4215. @item g
  4216. set green component expression
  4217. @item b
  4218. set blue component expression
  4219. @item a
  4220. alpha component expression
  4221. @item y
  4222. set Y/luminance component expression
  4223. @item u
  4224. set U/Cb component expression
  4225. @item v
  4226. set V/Cr component expression
  4227. @end table
  4228. Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
  4229. the corresponding pixel component values.
  4230. The exact component associated to each of the @var{c*} options depends on the
  4231. format in input.
  4232. The @var{lut} filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
  4233. @var{lutrgb} requires RGB pixel formats in input, and @var{lutyuv} requires YUV.
  4234. The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
  4235. @table @option
  4236. @item w
  4237. @item h
  4238. The input width and height.
  4239. @item val
  4240. The input value for the pixel component.
  4241. @item clipval
  4242. The input value, clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4243. @item maxval
  4244. The maximum value for the pixel component.
  4245. @item minval
  4246. The minimum value for the pixel component.
  4247. @item negval
  4248. The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
  4249. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range; it corresponds to the expression
  4250. "maxval-clipval+minval".
  4251. @item clip(val)
  4252. The computed value in @var{val}, clipped to the
  4253. @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range.
  4254. @item gammaval(gamma)
  4255. The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
  4256. clipped to the @var{minval}-@var{maxval} range. It corresponds to the
  4257. expression
  4258. "pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,@var{gamma})*(maxval-minval)+minval"
  4259. @end table
  4260. All expressions default to "val".
  4261. @subsection Examples
  4262. @itemize
  4263. @item
  4264. Negate input video:
  4265. @example
  4266. lutrgb="r=maxval+minval-val:g=maxval+minval-val:b=maxval+minval-val"
  4267. lutyuv="y=maxval+minval-val:u=maxval+minval-val:v=maxval+minval-val"
  4268. @end example
  4269. The above is the same as:
  4270. @example
  4271. lutrgb="r=negval:g=negval:b=negval"
  4272. lutyuv="y=negval:u=negval:v=negval"
  4273. @end example
  4274. @item
  4275. Negate luminance:
  4276. @example
  4277. lutyuv=y=negval
  4278. @end example
  4279. @item
  4280. Remove chroma components, turning the video into a graytone image:
  4281. @example
  4282. lutyuv="u=128:v=128"
  4283. @end example
  4284. @item
  4285. Apply a luma burning effect:
  4286. @example
  4287. lutyuv="y=2*val"
  4288. @end example
  4289. @item
  4290. Remove green and blue components:
  4291. @example
  4292. lutrgb="g=0:b=0"
  4293. @end example
  4294. @item
  4295. Set a constant alpha channel value on input:
  4296. @example
  4297. format=rgba,lutrgb=a="maxval-minval/2"
  4298. @end example
  4299. @item
  4300. Correct luminance gamma by a factor of 0.5:
  4301. @example
  4302. lutyuv=y=gammaval(0.5)
  4303. @end example
  4304. @item
  4305. Discard least significant bits of luma:
  4306. @example
  4307. lutyuv=y='bitand(val, 128+64+32)'
  4308. @end example
  4309. @end itemize
  4310. @section mergeplanes
  4311. Merge color channel components from several video streams.
  4312. The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
  4313. planes to the output video.
  4314. This filter accepts the following options:
  4315. @table @option
  4316. @item mapping
  4317. Set input to output plane mapping. Default is @code{0}.
  4318. The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
  4319. hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. 'Aa' describes the
  4320. mapping for the first plane of the output stream. 'A' sets the number of
  4321. the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and 'a' the plane number of the
  4322. corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
  4323. similar, 'Bb' describes the mapping for the output stream second
  4324. plane, 'Cc' describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
  4325. 'Dd' describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
  4326. @item format
  4327. Set output pixel format. Default is @code{yuva444p}.
  4328. @end table
  4329. @subsection Examples
  4330. @itemize
  4331. @item
  4332. Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
  4333. @example
  4334. [a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
  4335. @end example
  4336. @item
  4337. Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
  4338. @example
  4339. [a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
  4340. @end example
  4341. @item
  4342. Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
  4343. @example
  4344. format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
  4345. @end example
  4346. @item
  4347. Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
  4348. @example
  4349. format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
  4350. @end example
  4351. @item
  4352. Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
  4353. @example
  4354. format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
  4355. @end example
  4356. @end itemize
  4357. @section mcdeint
  4358. Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
  4359. It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
  4360. with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
  4361. This filter accepts the following options:
  4362. @table @option
  4363. @item mode
  4364. Set the deinterlacing mode.
  4365. It accepts one of the following values:
  4366. @table @samp
  4367. @item fast
  4368. @item medium
  4369. @item slow
  4370. use iterative motion estimation
  4371. @item extra_slow
  4372. like @samp{slow}, but use multiple reference frames.
  4373. @end table
  4374. Default value is @samp{fast}.
  4375. @item parity
  4376. Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
  4377. one of the following values:
  4378. @table @samp
  4379. @item 0, tff
  4380. assume top field first
  4381. @item 1, bff
  4382. assume bottom field first
  4383. @end table
  4384. Default value is @samp{bff}.
  4385. @item qp
  4386. Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
  4387. encoder.
  4388. Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
  4389. optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
  4390. @end table
  4391. @section mp
  4392. Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
  4393. This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
  4394. MPlayer/MEncoder.
  4395. This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
  4396. may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
  4397. be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
  4398. depending on them when writing portable scripts.
  4399. The filter accepts the parameters:
  4400. @var{filter_name}[:=]@var{filter_params}
  4401. @var{filter_name} is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
  4402. @var{filter_params} is a string containing the parameters accepted by
  4403. the named filter.
  4404. The list of the currently supported filters follows:
  4405. @table @var
  4406. @item eq2
  4407. @item eq
  4408. @item fspp
  4409. @item ilpack
  4410. @item pp7
  4411. @item softpulldown
  4412. @item uspp
  4413. @end table
  4414. The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
  4415. of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
  4416. the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
  4417. @subsection Examples
  4418. @itemize
  4419. @item
  4420. Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
  4421. @example
  4422. mp=eq2=1.0:2:0.5
  4423. @end example
  4424. @end itemize
  4425. See also mplayer(1), @url{http://www.mplayerhq.hu/}.
  4426. @section mpdecimate
  4427. Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
  4428. order to reduce frame rate.
  4429. The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
  4430. (e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
  4431. fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
  4432. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4433. @table @option
  4434. @item max
  4435. Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
  4436. positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
  4437. negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
  4438. number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
  4439. Default value is 0.
  4440. @item hi
  4441. @item lo
  4442. @item frac
  4443. Set the dropping threshold values.
  4444. Values for @option{hi} and @option{lo} are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
  4445. represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
  4446. corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
  4447. out differently over the block.
  4448. A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
  4449. than a threshold of @option{hi}, and if no more than @option{frac} blocks (1
  4450. meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of @option{lo}.
  4451. Default value for @option{hi} is 64*12, default value for @option{lo} is
  4452. 64*5, and default value for @option{frac} is 0.33.
  4453. @end table
  4454. @section negate
  4455. Negate input video.
  4456. It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
  4457. alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
  4458. @section noformat
  4459. Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
  4460. input to the next filter.
  4461. It accepts the following parameters:
  4462. @table @option
  4463. @item pix_fmts
  4464. A '|'-separated list of pixel format names, such as
  4465. apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
  4466. @end table
  4467. @subsection Examples
  4468. @itemize
  4469. @item
  4470. Force libavfilter to use a format different from @var{yuv420p} for the
  4471. input to the vflip filter:
  4472. @example
  4473. noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
  4474. @end example
  4475. @item
  4476. Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
  4477. @example
  4478. noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
  4479. @end example
  4480. @end itemize
  4481. @section noise
  4482. Add noise on video input frame.
  4483. The filter accepts the following options:
  4484. @table @option
  4485. @item all_seed
  4486. @item c0_seed
  4487. @item c1_seed
  4488. @item c2_seed
  4489. @item c3_seed
  4490. Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4491. of @var{all_seed}. Default value is @code{123457}.
  4492. @item all_strength, alls
  4493. @item c0_strength, c0s
  4494. @item c1_strength, c1s
  4495. @item c2_strength, c2s
  4496. @item c3_strength, c3s
  4497. Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
  4498. @var{all_strength}. Default value is @code{0}. Allowed range is [0, 100].
  4499. @item all_flags, allf
  4500. @item c0_flags, c0f
  4501. @item c1_flags, c1f
  4502. @item c2_flags, c2f
  4503. @item c3_flags, c3f
  4504. Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if @var{all_flags}.
  4505. Available values for component flags are:
  4506. @table @samp
  4507. @item a
  4508. averaged temporal noise (smoother)
  4509. @item p
  4510. mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
  4511. @item t
  4512. temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
  4513. @item u
  4514. uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
  4515. @end table
  4516. @end table
  4517. @subsection Examples
  4518. Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
  4519. @example
  4520. noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
  4521. @end example
  4522. @section null
  4523. Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
  4524. @section ocv
  4525. Apply a video transform using libopencv.
  4526. To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
  4527. configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libopencv}.
  4528. It accepts the following parameters:
  4529. @table @option
  4530. @item filter_name
  4531. The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
  4532. @item filter_params
  4533. The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
  4534. values are assumed.
  4535. @end table
  4536. Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
  4537. information:
  4538. @url{http://opencv.willowgarage.com/documentation/c/image_filtering.html}
  4539. Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
  4540. @anchor{dilate}
  4541. @subsection dilate
  4542. Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4543. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvDilate}.
  4544. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}|@var{nb_iterations}.
  4545. @var{struct_el} represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
  4546. @var{cols}x@var{rows}+@var{anchor_x}x@var{anchor_y}/@var{shape}
  4547. @var{cols} and @var{rows} represent the number of columns and rows of
  4548. the structuring element, @var{anchor_x} and @var{anchor_y} the anchor
  4549. point, and @var{shape} the shape for the structuring element. @var{shape}
  4550. must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
  4551. If the value for @var{shape} is "custom", it must be followed by a
  4552. string of the form "=@var{filename}". The file with name
  4553. @var{filename} is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
  4554. printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
  4555. @var{shape} is used, @var{cols} and @var{rows} are ignored, the number
  4556. or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
  4557. The default value for @var{struct_el} is "3x3+0x0/rect".
  4558. @var{nb_iterations} specifies the number of times the transform is
  4559. applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
  4560. Some examples:
  4561. @example
  4562. # Use the default values
  4563. ocv=dilate
  4564. # Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
  4565. ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
  4566. # Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
  4567. # The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
  4568. # *
  4569. # ***
  4570. # *****
  4571. # ***
  4572. # *
  4573. # The specified columns and rows are ignored
  4574. # but the anchor point coordinates are not
  4575. ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
  4576. @end example
  4577. @subsection erode
  4578. Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
  4579. It corresponds to the libopencv function @code{cvErode}.
  4580. It accepts the parameters: @var{struct_el}:@var{nb_iterations},
  4581. with the same syntax and semantics as the @ref{dilate} filter.
  4582. @subsection smooth
  4583. Smooth the input video.
  4584. The filter takes the following parameters:
  4585. @var{type}|@var{param1}|@var{param2}|@var{param3}|@var{param4}.
  4586. @var{type} is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
  4587. the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
  4588. or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
  4589. The meaning of @var{param1}, @var{param2}, @var{param3}, and @var{param4}
  4590. depend on the smooth type. @var{param1} and
  4591. @var{param2} accept integer positive values or 0. @var{param3} and
  4592. @var{param4} accept floating point values.
  4593. The default value for @var{param1} is 3. The default value for the
  4594. other parameters is 0.
  4595. These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
  4596. libopencv function @code{cvSmooth}.
  4597. @anchor{overlay}
  4598. @section overlay
  4599. Overlay one video on top of another.
  4600. It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
  4601. video on which the second input is overlayed.
  4602. It accepts the following parameters:
  4603. A description of the accepted options follows.
  4604. @table @option
  4605. @item x
  4606. @item y
  4607. Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlayed video
  4608. on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
  4609. the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
  4610. overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
  4611. @item eof_action
  4612. The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
  4613. one of the following values:
  4614. @table @option
  4615. @item repeat
  4616. Repeat the last frame (the default).
  4617. @item endall
  4618. End both streams.
  4619. @item pass
  4620. Pass the main input through.
  4621. @end table
  4622. @item eval
  4623. Set when the expressions for @option{x}, and @option{y} are evaluated.
  4624. It accepts the following values:
  4625. @table @samp
  4626. @item init
  4627. only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
  4628. when a command is processed
  4629. @item frame
  4630. evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
  4631. @end table
  4632. Default value is @samp{frame}.
  4633. @item shortest
  4634. If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
  4635. terminates. Default value is 0.
  4636. @item format
  4637. Set the format for the output video.
  4638. It accepts the following values:
  4639. @table @samp
  4640. @item yuv420
  4641. force YUV420 output
  4642. @item yuv422
  4643. force YUV422 output
  4644. @item yuv444
  4645. force YUV444 output
  4646. @item rgb
  4647. force RGB output
  4648. @end table
  4649. Default value is @samp{yuv420}.
  4650. @item rgb @emph{(deprecated)}
  4651. If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
  4652. color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
  4653. @option{format} instead.
  4654. @item repeatlast
  4655. If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
  4656. main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
  4657. behavior. Default value is 1.
  4658. @end table
  4659. The @option{x}, and @option{y} expressions can contain the following
  4660. parameters.
  4661. @table @option
  4662. @item main_w, W
  4663. @item main_h, H
  4664. The main input width and height.
  4665. @item overlay_w, w
  4666. @item overlay_h, h
  4667. The overlay input width and height.
  4668. @item x
  4669. @item y
  4670. The computed values for @var{x} and @var{y}. They are evaluated for
  4671. each new frame.
  4672. @item hsub
  4673. @item vsub
  4674. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
  4675. format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and
  4676. @var{vsub} is 1.
  4677. @item n
  4678. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  4679. @item pos
  4680. the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
  4681. @item t
  4682. The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It's NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
  4683. @end table
  4684. Note that the @var{n}, @var{pos}, @var{t} variables are available only
  4685. when evaluation is done @emph{per frame}, and will evaluate to NAN
  4686. when @option{eval} is set to @samp{init}.
  4687. Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
  4688. order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
  4689. to pass the two inputs through a @var{setpts=PTS-STARTPTS} filter to
  4690. have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
  4691. the @var{movie} filter does.
  4692. You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
  4693. efficiency of such approach.
  4694. @subsection Commands
  4695. This filter supports the following commands:
  4696. @table @option
  4697. @item x
  4698. @item y
  4699. Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
  4700. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  4701. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  4702. value.
  4703. @end table
  4704. @subsection Examples
  4705. @itemize
  4706. @item
  4707. Draw the overlay at 10 pixels from the bottom right corner of the main
  4708. video:
  4709. @example
  4710. overlay=main_w-overlay_w-10:main_h-overlay_h-10
  4711. @end example
  4712. Using named options the example above becomes:
  4713. @example
  4714. overlay=x=main_w-overlay_w-10:y=main_h-overlay_h-10
  4715. @end example
  4716. @item
  4717. Insert a transparent PNG logo in the bottom left corner of the input,
  4718. using the @command{ffmpeg} tool with the @code{-filter_complex} option:
  4719. @example
  4720. ffmpeg -i input -i logo -filter_complex 'overlay=10:main_h-overlay_h-10' output
  4721. @end example
  4722. @item
  4723. Insert 2 different transparent PNG logos (second logo on bottom
  4724. right corner) using the @command{ffmpeg} tool:
  4725. @example
  4726. ffmpeg -i input -i logo1 -i logo2 -filter_complex 'overlay=x=10:y=H-h-10,overlay=x=W-w-10:y=H-h-10' output
  4727. @end example
  4728. @item
  4729. Add a transparent color layer on top of the main video; @code{WxH}
  4730. must specify the size of the main input to the overlay filter:
  4731. @example
  4732. color=color=red@@.3:size=WxH [over]; [in][over] overlay [out]
  4733. @end example
  4734. @item
  4735. Play an original video and a filtered version (here with the deshake
  4736. filter) side by side using the @command{ffplay} tool:
  4737. @example
  4738. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[a][b]; [a]pad=iw*2:ih[src]; [b]deshake[filt]; [src][filt]overlay=w'
  4739. @end example
  4740. The above command is the same as:
  4741. @example
  4742. ffplay input.avi -vf 'split[b], pad=iw*2[src], [b]deshake, [src]overlay=w'
  4743. @end example
  4744. @item
  4745. Make a sliding overlay appearing from the left to the right top part of the
  4746. screen starting since time 2:
  4747. @example
  4748. overlay=x='if(gte(t,2), -w+(t-2)*20, NAN)':y=0
  4749. @end example
  4750. @item
  4751. Compose output by putting two input videos side to side:
  4752. @example
  4753. ffmpeg -i left.avi -i right.avi -filter_complex "
  4754. nullsrc=size=200x100 [background];
  4755. [0:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [left];
  4756. [1:v] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS, scale=100x100 [right];
  4757. [background][left] overlay=shortest=1 [background+left];
  4758. [background+left][right] overlay=shortest=1:x=100 [left+right]
  4759. "
  4760. @end example
  4761. @item
  4762. Mask 10-20 seconds of a video by applying the delogo filter to a section
  4763. @example
  4764. ffmpeg -i test.avi -codec:v:0 wmv2 -ar 11025 -b:v 9000k
  4765. -vf '[in]split[split_main][split_delogo];[split_delogo]trim=start=360:end=371,delogo=0:0:640:480[delogoed];[split_main][delogoed]overlay=eof_action=pass[out]'
  4766. masked.avi
  4767. @end example
  4768. @item
  4769. Chain several overlays in cascade:
  4770. @example
  4771. nullsrc=s=200x200 [bg];
  4772. testsrc=s=100x100, split=4 [in0][in1][in2][in3];
  4773. [in0] lutrgb=r=0, [bg] overlay=0:0 [mid0];
  4774. [in1] lutrgb=g=0, [mid0] overlay=100:0 [mid1];
  4775. [in2] lutrgb=b=0, [mid1] overlay=0:100 [mid2];
  4776. [in3] null, [mid2] overlay=100:100 [out0]
  4777. @end example
  4778. @end itemize
  4779. @section owdenoise
  4780. Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
  4781. The filter accepts the following options:
  4782. @table @option
  4783. @item depth
  4784. Set depth.
  4785. Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
  4786. slow down filtering.
  4787. Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is @code{8}.
  4788. @item luma_strength, ls
  4789. Set luma strength.
  4790. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  4791. @item chroma_strength, cs
  4792. Set chroma strength.
  4793. Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is @code{1.0}.
  4794. @end table
  4795. @section pad
  4796. Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
  4797. provided @var{x}, @var{y} coordinates.
  4798. It accepts the following parameters:
  4799. @table @option
  4800. @item width, w
  4801. @item height, h
  4802. Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
  4803. paddings added. If the value for @var{width} or @var{height} is 0, the
  4804. corresponding input size is used for the output.
  4805. The @var{width} expression can reference the value set by the
  4806. @var{height} expression, and vice versa.
  4807. The default value of @var{width} and @var{height} is 0.
  4808. @item x
  4809. @item y
  4810. Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
  4811. with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
  4812. The @var{x} expression can reference the value set by the @var{y}
  4813. expression, and vice versa.
  4814. The default value of @var{x} and @var{y} is 0.
  4815. @item color
  4816. Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
  4817. check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  4818. The default value of @var{color} is "black".
  4819. @end table
  4820. The value for the @var{width}, @var{height}, @var{x}, and @var{y}
  4821. options are expressions containing the following constants:
  4822. @table @option
  4823. @item in_w
  4824. @item in_h
  4825. The input video width and height.
  4826. @item iw
  4827. @item ih
  4828. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  4829. @item out_w
  4830. @item out_h
  4831. The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
  4832. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions.
  4833. @item ow
  4834. @item oh
  4835. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}.
  4836. @item x
  4837. @item y
  4838. The x and y offsets as specified by the @var{x} and @var{y}
  4839. expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
  4840. @item a
  4841. same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  4842. @item sar
  4843. input sample aspect ratio
  4844. @item dar
  4845. input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (@var{iw} / @var{ih}) * @var{sar}
  4846. @item hsub
  4847. @item vsub
  4848. The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  4849. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  4850. @end table
  4851. @subsection Examples
  4852. @itemize
  4853. @item
  4854. Add paddings with the color "violet" to the input video. The output video
  4855. size is 640x480, and the top-left corner of the input video is placed at
  4856. column 0, row 40
  4857. @example
  4858. pad=640:480:0:40:violet
  4859. @end example
  4860. The example above is equivalent to the following command:
  4861. @example
  4862. pad=width=640:height=480:x=0:y=40:color=violet
  4863. @end example
  4864. @item
  4865. Pad the input to get an output with dimensions increased by 3/2,
  4866. and put the input video at the center of the padded area:
  4867. @example
  4868. pad="3/2*iw:3/2*ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4869. @end example
  4870. @item
  4871. Pad the input to get a squared output with size equal to the maximum
  4872. value between the input width and height, and put the input video at
  4873. the center of the padded area:
  4874. @example
  4875. pad="max(iw\,ih):ow:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4876. @end example
  4877. @item
  4878. Pad the input to get a final w/h ratio of 16:9:
  4879. @example
  4880. pad="ih*16/9:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4881. @end example
  4882. @item
  4883. In case of anamorphic video, in order to set the output display aspect
  4884. correctly, it is necessary to use @var{sar} in the expression,
  4885. according to the relation:
  4886. @example
  4887. (ih * X / ih) * sar = output_dar
  4888. X = output_dar / sar
  4889. @end example
  4890. Thus the previous example needs to be modified to:
  4891. @example
  4892. pad="ih*16/9/sar:ih:(ow-iw)/2:(oh-ih)/2"
  4893. @end example
  4894. @item
  4895. Double the output size and put the input video in the bottom-right
  4896. corner of the output padded area:
  4897. @example
  4898. pad="2*iw:2*ih:ow-iw:oh-ih"
  4899. @end example
  4900. @end itemize
  4901. @section perspective
  4902. Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
  4903. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4904. @table @option
  4905. @item x0
  4906. @item y0
  4907. @item x1
  4908. @item y1
  4909. @item x2
  4910. @item y2
  4911. @item x3
  4912. @item y3
  4913. Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
  4914. Default values are @code{0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H} with which perspective will remain unchanged.
  4915. The expressions can use the following variables:
  4916. @table @option
  4917. @item W
  4918. @item H
  4919. the width and height of video frame.
  4920. @end table
  4921. @item interpolation
  4922. Set interpolation for perspective correction.
  4923. It accepts the following values:
  4924. @table @samp
  4925. @item linear
  4926. @item cubic
  4927. @end table
  4928. Default value is @samp{linear}.
  4929. @end table
  4930. @section phase
  4931. Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
  4932. The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
  4933. opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
  4934. A description of the accepted parameters follows.
  4935. @table @option
  4936. @item mode
  4937. Set phase mode.
  4938. It accepts the following values:
  4939. @table @samp
  4940. @item t
  4941. Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
  4942. Filter will delay the bottom field.
  4943. @item b
  4944. Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
  4945. Filter will delay the top field.
  4946. @item p
  4947. Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
  4948. for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
  4949. actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
  4950. @item a
  4951. Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
  4952. opposite.
  4953. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} modes on a frame by frame
  4954. basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
  4955. then this works just like @samp{u}.
  4956. @item u
  4957. Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
  4958. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{b} on a frame by frame basis by
  4959. analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
  4960. match between the fields.
  4961. @item T
  4962. Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  4963. Filter selects among @samp{t} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  4964. @item B
  4965. Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
  4966. Filter selects among @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis.
  4967. @item A
  4968. Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
  4969. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using field flags and
  4970. image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
  4971. like @samp{U}. This is the default mode.
  4972. @item U
  4973. Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
  4974. Filter selects among @samp{t}, @samp{b} and @samp{p} using image analysis only.
  4975. @end table
  4976. @end table
  4977. @section pixdesctest
  4978. Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
  4979. testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
  4980. For example:
  4981. @example
  4982. format=monow, pixdesctest
  4983. @end example
  4984. can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
  4985. @section pp
  4986. Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
  4987. library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (@code{--enable-gpl}).
  4988. Subfilters must be separated by '/' and can be disabled by prepending a '-'.
  4989. Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
  4990. interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
  4991. The filters accept the following options:
  4992. @table @option
  4993. @item subfilters
  4994. Set postprocessing subfilters string.
  4995. @end table
  4996. All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
  4997. @table @option
  4998. @item a/autoq
  4999. Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
  5000. @item c/chrom
  5001. Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
  5002. @item y/nochrom
  5003. Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
  5004. @item n/noluma
  5005. Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
  5006. @end table
  5007. These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a '|'.
  5008. Available subfilters are:
  5009. @table @option
  5010. @item hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5011. Horizontal deblocking filter
  5012. @table @option
  5013. @item difference
  5014. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5015. @item flatness
  5016. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5017. @end table
  5018. @item vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5019. Vertical deblocking filter
  5020. @table @option
  5021. @item difference
  5022. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5023. @item flatness
  5024. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5025. @end table
  5026. @item ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5027. Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
  5028. @table @option
  5029. @item difference
  5030. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5031. @item flatness
  5032. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5033. @end table
  5034. @item va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]]
  5035. Accurate vertical deblocking filter
  5036. @table @option
  5037. @item difference
  5038. Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: @code{32}).
  5039. @item flatness
  5040. Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: @code{39}).
  5041. @end table
  5042. @end table
  5043. The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
  5044. flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
  5045. thresholds.
  5046. @table @option
  5047. @item h1/x1hdeblock
  5048. Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
  5049. @item v1/x1vdeblock
  5050. Experimental vertical deblocking filter
  5051. @item dr/dering
  5052. Deringing filter
  5053. @item tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
  5054. @table @option
  5055. @item threshold1
  5056. larger -> stronger filtering
  5057. @item threshold2
  5058. larger -> stronger filtering
  5059. @item threshold3
  5060. larger -> stronger filtering
  5061. @end table
  5062. @item al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
  5063. @table @option
  5064. @item f/fullyrange
  5065. Stretch luminance to @code{0-255}.
  5066. @end table
  5067. @item lb/linblenddeint
  5068. Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5069. filtering all lines with a @code{(1 2 1)} filter.
  5070. @item li/linipoldeint
  5071. Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
  5072. linearly interpolating every second line.
  5073. @item ci/cubicipoldeint
  5074. Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
  5075. cubically interpolating every second line.
  5076. @item md/mediandeint
  5077. Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
  5078. median filter to every second line.
  5079. @item fd/ffmpegdeint
  5080. FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
  5081. second line with a @code{(-1 4 2 4 -1)} filter.
  5082. @item l5/lowpass5
  5083. Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
  5084. block by filtering all lines with a @code{(-1 2 6 2 -1)} filter.
  5085. @item fq/forceQuant[|quantizer]
  5086. Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
  5087. specify.
  5088. @table @option
  5089. @item quantizer
  5090. Quantizer to use
  5091. @end table
  5092. @item de/default
  5093. Default pp filter combination (@code{hb|a,vb|a,dr|a})
  5094. @item fa/fast
  5095. Fast pp filter combination (@code{h1|a,v1|a,dr|a})
  5096. @item ac
  5097. High quality pp filter combination (@code{ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a})
  5098. @end table
  5099. @subsection Examples
  5100. @itemize
  5101. @item
  5102. Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
  5103. brightness/contrast:
  5104. @example
  5105. pp=hb/vb/dr/al
  5106. @end example
  5107. @item
  5108. Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
  5109. @example
  5110. pp=de/-al
  5111. @end example
  5112. @item
  5113. Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
  5114. @example
  5115. pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
  5116. @end example
  5117. @item
  5118. Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
  5119. automatically depending on available CPU time:
  5120. @example
  5121. pp=hb|y/vb|a
  5122. @end example
  5123. @end itemize
  5124. @section psnr
  5125. Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
  5126. Ratio) between two input videos.
  5127. This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
  5128. considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
  5129. output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
  5130. the PSNR.
  5131. Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
  5132. this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
  5133. have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
  5134. The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
  5135. The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
  5136. frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
  5137. equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
  5138. @example
  5139. PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
  5140. @end example
  5141. Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
  5142. image.
  5143. The description of the accepted parameters follows.
  5144. @table @option
  5145. @item stats_file, f
  5146. If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
  5147. each individual frame.
  5148. @end table
  5149. The file printed if @var{stats_file} is selected, contains a sequence of
  5150. key/value pairs of the form @var{key}:@var{value} for each compared
  5151. couple of frames.
  5152. A description of each shown parameter follows:
  5153. @table @option
  5154. @item n
  5155. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
  5156. @item mse_avg
  5157. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5158. frames, averaged over all the image components.
  5159. @item mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a
  5160. Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
  5161. frames for the component specified by the suffix.
  5162. @item psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a
  5163. Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
  5164. specified by the suffix.
  5165. @end table
  5166. For example:
  5167. @example
  5168. movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  5169. [main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
  5170. @end example
  5171. On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
  5172. reference file @file{ref_movie.mpg}. The PSNR of each individual frame
  5173. is stored in @file{stats.log}.
  5174. @anchor{pullup}
  5175. @section pullup
  5176. Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
  5177. hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
  5178. content.
  5179. The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
  5180. its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
  5181. onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
  5182. fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
  5183. To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
  5184. pullup, use @code{fps=24000/1001} if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
  5185. @code{fps=24} for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
  5186. The filter accepts the following options:
  5187. @table @option
  5188. @item jl
  5189. @item jr
  5190. @item jt
  5191. @item jb
  5192. These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
  5193. bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
  5194. while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
  5195. The default is 8 pixels on each side.
  5196. @item sb
  5197. Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
  5198. filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
  5199. excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
  5200. Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
  5201. This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
  5202. the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
  5203. Default value is @code{0}.
  5204. @item mp
  5205. Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
  5206. @table @samp
  5207. @item l
  5208. Use luma plane.
  5209. @item u
  5210. Use chroma blue plane.
  5211. @item v
  5212. Use chroma red plane.
  5213. @end table
  5214. This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
  5215. for doing filter's computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
  5216. source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
  5217. is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
  5218. The main purpose of setting @option{mp} to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
  5219. load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
  5220. @end table
  5221. For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
  5222. necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
  5223. telecine NTSC input:
  5224. @example
  5225. ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
  5226. @end example
  5227. @section removelogo
  5228. Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
  5229. pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
  5230. comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
  5231. The filter accepts the following options:
  5232. @table @option
  5233. @item filename, f
  5234. Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
  5235. libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
  5236. video stream being processed.
  5237. @end table
  5238. Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
  5239. considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
  5240. the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
  5241. rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
  5242. recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
  5243. visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
  5244. filter once or twice.
  5245. If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
  5246. logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
  5247. reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
  5248. much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
  5249. the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
  5250. pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
  5251. @section rotate
  5252. Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
  5253. The filter accepts the following options:
  5254. A description of the optional parameters follows.
  5255. @table @option
  5256. @item angle, a
  5257. Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
  5258. clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
  5259. result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
  5260. This expression is evaluated for each frame.
  5261. @item out_w, ow
  5262. Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
  5263. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5264. @item out_h, oh
  5265. Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
  5266. This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
  5267. @item bilinear
  5268. Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
  5269. it. Default value is 1.
  5270. @item fillcolor, c
  5271. Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
  5272. image. For the generalsyntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  5273. ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
  5274. background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
  5275. Default value is "black".
  5276. @end table
  5277. The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
  5278. following constants and functions:
  5279. @table @option
  5280. @item n
  5281. sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
  5282. before the first frame is filtered.
  5283. @item t
  5284. time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
  5285. configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
  5286. @item hsub
  5287. @item vsub
  5288. horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5289. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5290. @item in_w, iw
  5291. @item in_h, ih
  5292. the input video width and height
  5293. @item out_w, ow
  5294. @item out_h, oh
  5295. the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
  5296. specified by the @var{width} and @var{height} expressions
  5297. @item rotw(a)
  5298. @item roth(a)
  5299. the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
  5300. video rotated by @var{a} radians.
  5301. These are only available when computing the @option{out_w} and
  5302. @option{out_h} expressions.
  5303. @end table
  5304. @subsection Examples
  5305. @itemize
  5306. @item
  5307. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
  5308. @example
  5309. rotate=PI/6
  5310. @end example
  5311. @item
  5312. Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
  5313. @example
  5314. rotate=-PI/6
  5315. @end example
  5316. @item
  5317. Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
  5318. @example
  5319. rotate=45*PI/180
  5320. @end example
  5321. @item
  5322. Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
  5323. @example
  5324. rotate=PI/3+2*PI*t/T
  5325. @end example
  5326. @item
  5327. Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
  5328. seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
  5329. @example
  5330. rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
  5331. @end example
  5332. @item
  5333. Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
  5334. input video is always completely contained in the output:
  5335. @example
  5336. rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
  5337. @end example
  5338. @item
  5339. Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
  5340. shown:
  5341. @example
  5342. rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
  5343. @end example
  5344. @end itemize
  5345. @subsection Commands
  5346. The filter supports the following commands:
  5347. @table @option
  5348. @item a, angle
  5349. Set the angle expression.
  5350. The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
  5351. If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
  5352. value.
  5353. @end table
  5354. @section sab
  5355. Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
  5356. The filter accepts the following options:
  5357. @table @option
  5358. @item luma_radius, lr
  5359. Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
  5360. value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
  5361. in slower processing.
  5362. @item luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr
  5363. Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
  5364. value is 1.0.
  5365. @item luma_strength, ls
  5366. Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
  5367. be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
  5368. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5369. Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
  5370. greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
  5371. processing.
  5372. @item chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr
  5373. Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
  5374. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5375. Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
  5376. must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
  5377. @end table
  5378. Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
  5379. corresponding luma option value.
  5380. @anchor{scale}
  5381. @section scale
  5382. Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
  5383. The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
  5384. of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
  5385. If the input image format is different from the format requested by
  5386. the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
  5387. requested format.
  5388. @subsection Options
  5389. The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
  5390. supported by the libswscale scaler.
  5391. See @ref{scaler_options,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for
  5392. the complete list of scaler options.
  5393. @table @option
  5394. @item width, w
  5395. @item height, h
  5396. Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
  5397. dimension.
  5398. If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
  5399. If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
  5400. maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
  5401. other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
  5402. used
  5403. If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
  5404. that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
  5405. specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
  5406. dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
  5407. See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
  5408. expression.
  5409. @item interl
  5410. Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
  5411. @table @samp
  5412. @item 1
  5413. Force interlaced aware scaling.
  5414. @item 0
  5415. Do not apply interlaced scaling.
  5416. @item -1
  5417. Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
  5418. are flagged as interlaced or not.
  5419. @end table
  5420. Default value is @samp{0}.
  5421. @item flags
  5422. Set libswscale scaling flags. See
  5423. @ref{sws_flags,,the ffmpeg-scaler manual,ffmpeg-scaler} for the
  5424. complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
  5425. the default flags.
  5426. @item size, s
  5427. Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5428. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5429. @item in_color_matrix
  5430. @item out_color_matrix
  5431. Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
  5432. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5433. a specific value used for the output and encoder.
  5434. If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
  5435. Possible values:
  5436. @table @samp
  5437. @item auto
  5438. Choose automatically.
  5439. @item bt709
  5440. Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
  5441. Recommendation BT.709.
  5442. @item fcc
  5443. Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
  5444. Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
  5445. @item bt601
  5446. Set color space conforming to:
  5447. @itemize
  5448. @item
  5449. ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
  5450. @item
  5451. ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
  5452. @item
  5453. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
  5454. @end itemize
  5455. @item smpte240m
  5456. Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
  5457. @end table
  5458. @item in_range
  5459. @item out_range
  5460. Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
  5461. This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
  5462. a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
  5463. range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
  5464. @table @samp
  5465. @item auto
  5466. Choose automatically.
  5467. @item jpeg/full/pc
  5468. Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5469. @item mpeg/tv
  5470. Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
  5471. @end table
  5472. @item force_original_aspect_ratio
  5473. Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
  5474. keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
  5475. @table @samp
  5476. @item disable
  5477. Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
  5478. @item decrease
  5479. The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
  5480. @item increase
  5481. The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
  5482. @end table
  5483. One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device's
  5484. maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
  5485. that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
  5486. 1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
  5487. decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
  5488. 1280x533.
  5489. Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for @option{w}
  5490. or @option{h}, you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
  5491. to work.
  5492. @end table
  5493. The values of the @option{w} and @option{h} options are expressions
  5494. containing the following constants:
  5495. @table @var
  5496. @item in_w
  5497. @item in_h
  5498. The input width and height
  5499. @item iw
  5500. @item ih
  5501. These are the same as @var{in_w} and @var{in_h}.
  5502. @item out_w
  5503. @item out_h
  5504. The output (scaled) width and height
  5505. @item ow
  5506. @item oh
  5507. These are the same as @var{out_w} and @var{out_h}
  5508. @item a
  5509. The same as @var{iw} / @var{ih}
  5510. @item sar
  5511. input sample aspect ratio
  5512. @item dar
  5513. The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from @code{(iw / ih) * sar}.
  5514. @item hsub
  5515. @item vsub
  5516. horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5517. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5518. @item ohsub
  5519. @item ovsub
  5520. horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
  5521. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5522. @end table
  5523. @subsection Examples
  5524. @itemize
  5525. @item
  5526. Scale the input video to a size of 200x100
  5527. @example
  5528. scale=w=200:h=100
  5529. @end example
  5530. This is equivalent to:
  5531. @example
  5532. scale=200:100
  5533. @end example
  5534. or:
  5535. @example
  5536. scale=200x100
  5537. @end example
  5538. @item
  5539. Specify a size abbreviation for the output size:
  5540. @example
  5541. scale=qcif
  5542. @end example
  5543. which can also be written as:
  5544. @example
  5545. scale=size=qcif
  5546. @end example
  5547. @item
  5548. Scale the input to 2x:
  5549. @example
  5550. scale=w=2*iw:h=2*ih
  5551. @end example
  5552. @item
  5553. The above is the same as:
  5554. @example
  5555. scale=2*in_w:2*in_h
  5556. @end example
  5557. @item
  5558. Scale the input to 2x with forced interlaced scaling:
  5559. @example
  5560. scale=2*iw:2*ih:interl=1
  5561. @end example
  5562. @item
  5563. Scale the input to half size:
  5564. @example
  5565. scale=w=iw/2:h=ih/2
  5566. @end example
  5567. @item
  5568. Increase the width, and set the height to the same size:
  5569. @example
  5570. scale=3/2*iw:ow
  5571. @end example
  5572. @item
  5573. Seek Greek harmony:
  5574. @example
  5575. scale=iw:1/PHI*iw
  5576. scale=ih*PHI:ih
  5577. @end example
  5578. @item
  5579. Increase the height, and set the width to 3/2 of the height:
  5580. @example
  5581. scale=w=3/2*oh:h=3/5*ih
  5582. @end example
  5583. @item
  5584. Increase the size, making the size a multiple of the chroma
  5585. subsample values:
  5586. @example
  5587. scale="trunc(3/2*iw/hsub)*hsub:trunc(3/2*ih/vsub)*vsub"
  5588. @end example
  5589. @item
  5590. Increase the width to a maximum of 500 pixels,
  5591. keeping the same aspect ratio as the input:
  5592. @example
  5593. scale=w='min(500\, iw*3/2):h=-1'
  5594. @end example
  5595. @end itemize
  5596. @section separatefields
  5597. The @code{separatefields} takes a frame-based video input and splits
  5598. each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
  5599. with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
  5600. This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
  5601. of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
  5602. If it gets it wrong use @ref{setfield} filter before @code{separatefields} filter.
  5603. @section setdar, setsar
  5604. The @code{setdar} filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
  5605. output video.
  5606. This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
  5607. Ratio, according to the following equation:
  5608. @example
  5609. @var{DAR} = @var{HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION} / @var{VERTICAL_RESOLUTION} * @var{SAR}
  5610. @end example
  5611. Keep in mind that the @code{setdar} filter does not modify the pixel
  5612. dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
  5613. this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
  5614. e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
  5615. applied.
  5616. The @code{setsar} filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
  5617. the filter output video.
  5618. Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
  5619. output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
  5620. above.
  5621. Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the @code{setsar}
  5622. filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
  5623. another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
  5624. It accepts the following parameters:
  5625. @table @option
  5626. @item r, ratio, dar (@code{setdar} only), sar (@code{setsar} only)
  5627. Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
  5628. The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
  5629. a string of the form @var{num}:@var{den}, where @var{num} and
  5630. @var{den} are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
  5631. the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
  5632. In case the form "@var{num}:@var{den}" is used, the @code{:} character
  5633. should be escaped.
  5634. @item max
  5635. Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
  5636. denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
  5637. Default value is @code{100}.
  5638. @end table
  5639. The parameter @var{sar} is an expression containing
  5640. the following constants:
  5641. @table @option
  5642. @item E, PI, PHI
  5643. These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
  5644. (Euler's number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
  5645. @item w, h
  5646. The input width and height.
  5647. @item a
  5648. These are the same as @var{w} / @var{h}.
  5649. @item sar
  5650. The input sample aspect ratio.
  5651. @item dar
  5652. The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
  5653. (@var{w} / @var{h}) * @var{sar}.
  5654. @item hsub, vsub
  5655. Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
  5656. pixel format "yuv422p" @var{hsub} is 2 and @var{vsub} is 1.
  5657. @end table
  5658. @subsection Examples
  5659. @itemize
  5660. @item
  5661. To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
  5662. @example
  5663. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5664. setdar=dar=16/9
  5665. setdar=dar=1.77777
  5666. @end example
  5667. @item
  5668. To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
  5669. @example
  5670. setsar=sar=10/11
  5671. @end example
  5672. @item
  5673. To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
  5674. 1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
  5675. @example
  5676. setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
  5677. @end example
  5678. @end itemize
  5679. @anchor{setfield}
  5680. @section setfield
  5681. Force field for the output video frame.
  5682. The @code{setfield} filter marks the interlace type field for the
  5683. output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
  5684. corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
  5685. following filters (e.g. @code{fieldorder} or @code{yadif}).
  5686. The filter accepts the following options:
  5687. @table @option
  5688. @item mode
  5689. Available values are:
  5690. @table @samp
  5691. @item auto
  5692. Keep the same field property.
  5693. @item bff
  5694. Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
  5695. @item tff
  5696. Mark the frame as top-field-first.
  5697. @item prog
  5698. Mark the frame as progressive.
  5699. @end table
  5700. @end table
  5701. @section showinfo
  5702. Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
  5703. The input video is not modified.
  5704. The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
  5705. @var{key}:@var{value}.
  5706. It accepts the following parameters:
  5707. @table @option
  5708. @item n
  5709. The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
  5710. @item pts
  5711. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  5712. time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
  5713. @item pts_time
  5714. The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
  5715. seconds.
  5716. @item pos
  5717. The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
  5718. unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
  5719. @item fmt
  5720. The pixel format name.
  5721. @item sar
  5722. The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
  5723. @var{num}/@var{den}.
  5724. @item s
  5725. The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  5726. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  5727. @item i
  5728. The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
  5729. for bottom field first).
  5730. @item iskey
  5731. This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
  5732. @item type
  5733. The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
  5734. P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
  5735. Also refer to the documentation of the @code{AVPictureType} enum and of
  5736. the @code{av_get_picture_type_char} function defined in
  5737. @file{libavutil/avutil.h}.
  5738. @item checksum
  5739. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
  5740. @item plane_checksum
  5741. The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
  5742. expressed in the form "[@var{c0} @var{c1} @var{c2} @var{c3}]".
  5743. @end table
  5744. @section shuffleplanes
  5745. Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
  5746. It accepts the following parameters:
  5747. @table @option
  5748. @item map0
  5749. The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
  5750. @item map1
  5751. The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
  5752. @item map2
  5753. The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
  5754. @item map3
  5755. The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
  5756. @end table
  5757. The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
  5758. Swap the second and third planes of the input:
  5759. @example
  5760. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
  5761. @end example
  5762. @anchor{smartblur}
  5763. @section smartblur
  5764. Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
  5765. It accepts the following options:
  5766. @table @option
  5767. @item luma_radius, lr
  5768. Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  5769. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  5770. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  5771. @item luma_strength, ls
  5772. Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
  5773. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  5774. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  5775. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  5776. @item luma_threshold, lt
  5777. Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  5778. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  5779. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  5780. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  5781. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  5782. @item chroma_radius, cr
  5783. Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
  5784. the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
  5785. used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
  5786. @item chroma_strength, cs
  5787. Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
  5788. in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
  5789. in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
  5790. [-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
  5791. @item chroma_threshold, ct
  5792. Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
  5793. whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
  5794. integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
  5795. a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
  5796. in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
  5797. @end table
  5798. If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
  5799. is set.
  5800. @section stereo3d
  5801. Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
  5802. The filters accept the following options:
  5803. @table @option
  5804. @item in
  5805. Set stereoscopic image format of input.
  5806. Available values for input image formats are:
  5807. @table @samp
  5808. @item sbsl
  5809. side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
  5810. @item sbsr
  5811. side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
  5812. @item sbs2l
  5813. side by side parallel with half width resolution
  5814. (left eye left, right eye right)
  5815. @item sbs2r
  5816. side by side crosseye with half width resolution
  5817. (right eye left, left eye right)
  5818. @item abl
  5819. above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
  5820. @item abr
  5821. above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
  5822. @item ab2l
  5823. above-below with half height resolution
  5824. (left eye above, right eye below)
  5825. @item ab2r
  5826. above-below with half height resolution
  5827. (right eye above, left eye below)
  5828. @item al
  5829. alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
  5830. @item ar
  5831. alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
  5832. Default value is @samp{sbsl}.
  5833. @end table
  5834. @item out
  5835. Set stereoscopic image format of output.
  5836. Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
  5837. @table @samp
  5838. @item arbg
  5839. anaglyph red/blue gray
  5840. (red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5841. @item argg
  5842. anaglyph red/green gray
  5843. (red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
  5844. @item arcg
  5845. anaglyph red/cyan gray
  5846. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5847. @item arch
  5848. anaglyph red/cyan half colored
  5849. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5850. @item arcc
  5851. anaglyph red/cyan color
  5852. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5853. @item arcd
  5854. anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  5855. (red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
  5856. @item agmg
  5857. anaglyph green/magenta gray
  5858. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5859. @item agmh
  5860. anaglyph green/magenta half colored
  5861. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5862. @item agmc
  5863. anaglyph green/magenta colored
  5864. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5865. @item agmd
  5866. anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  5867. (green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
  5868. @item aybg
  5869. anaglyph yellow/blue gray
  5870. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5871. @item aybh
  5872. anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
  5873. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5874. @item aybc
  5875. anaglyph yellow/blue colored
  5876. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5877. @item aybd
  5878. anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
  5879. (yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
  5880. @item irl
  5881. interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
  5882. @item irr
  5883. interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
  5884. @item ml
  5885. mono output (left eye only)
  5886. @item mr
  5887. mono output (right eye only)
  5888. @end table
  5889. Default value is @samp{arcd}.
  5890. @end table
  5891. @subsection Examples
  5892. @itemize
  5893. @item
  5894. Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
  5895. @example
  5896. stereo3d=sbsl:aybd
  5897. @end example
  5898. @item
  5899. Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
  5900. @example
  5901. stereo3d=abl:sbsr
  5902. @end example
  5903. @end itemize
  5904. @section spp
  5905. Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
  5906. at several (or - in the case of @option{quality} level @code{6} - all) shifts
  5907. and average the results.
  5908. The filter accepts the following options:
  5909. @table @option
  5910. @item quality
  5911. Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
  5912. an integer in the range 0-6. If set to @code{0}, the filter will have no
  5913. effect. A value of @code{6} means the higher quality. For each increment of
  5914. that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
  5915. @code{3}.
  5916. @item qp
  5917. Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
  5918. from the video stream (if available).
  5919. @item mode
  5920. Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
  5921. @table @samp
  5922. @item hard
  5923. Set hard thresholding (default).
  5924. @item soft
  5925. Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
  5926. @end table
  5927. @item use_bframe_qp
  5928. Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to @code{1}. Using this
  5929. option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
  5930. @code{0} (not enabled).
  5931. @end table
  5932. @anchor{subtitles}
  5933. @section subtitles
  5934. Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
  5935. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  5936. @code{--enable-libass}. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
  5937. libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
  5938. Alpha) subtitles format.
  5939. The filter accepts the following options:
  5940. @table @option
  5941. @item filename, f
  5942. Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
  5943. @item original_size
  5944. Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
  5945. was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
  5946. the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
  5947. this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
  5948. changed.
  5949. @item charenc
  5950. Set subtitles input character encoding. @code{subtitles} filter only. Only
  5951. useful if not UTF-8.
  5952. @item stream_index, si
  5953. Set subtitles stream index. @code{subtitles} filter only.
  5954. @end table
  5955. If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
  5956. specifies the @option{filename}.
  5957. For example, to render the file @file{sub.srt} on top of the input
  5958. video, use the command:
  5959. @example
  5960. subtitles=sub.srt
  5961. @end example
  5962. which is equivalent to:
  5963. @example
  5964. subtitles=filename=sub.srt
  5965. @end example
  5966. To render the default subtitles stream from file @file{video.mkv}, use:
  5967. @example
  5968. subtitles=video.mkv
  5969. @end example
  5970. To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
  5971. @example
  5972. subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
  5973. @end example
  5974. @section super2xsai
  5975. Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
  5976. Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
  5977. Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
  5978. @section swapuv
  5979. Swap U & V plane.
  5980. @section telecine
  5981. Apply telecine process to the video.
  5982. This filter accepts the following options:
  5983. @table @option
  5984. @item first_field
  5985. @table @samp
  5986. @item top, t
  5987. top field first
  5988. @item bottom, b
  5989. bottom field first
  5990. The default value is @code{top}.
  5991. @end table
  5992. @item pattern
  5993. A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
  5994. The default value is @code{23}.
  5995. @end table
  5996. @example
  5997. Some typical patterns:
  5998. NTSC output (30i):
  5999. 27.5p: 32222
  6000. 24p: 23 (classic)
  6001. 24p: 2332 (preferred)
  6002. 20p: 33
  6003. 18p: 334
  6004. 16p: 3444
  6005. PAL output (25i):
  6006. 27.5p: 12222
  6007. 24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
  6008. 16.67p: 33
  6009. 16p: 33333334
  6010. @end example
  6011. @section thumbnail
  6012. Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
  6013. The filter accepts the following options:
  6014. @table @option
  6015. @item n
  6016. Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of @var{n} frames, the filter
  6017. will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of @var{n} frames until
  6018. the end. Default is @code{100}.
  6019. @end table
  6020. Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger @var{n}
  6021. value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
  6022. @subsection Examples
  6023. @itemize
  6024. @item
  6025. Extract one picture each 50 frames:
  6026. @example
  6027. thumbnail=50
  6028. @end example
  6029. @item
  6030. Complete example of a thumbnail creation with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6031. @example
  6032. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
  6033. @end example
  6034. @end itemize
  6035. @section tile
  6036. Tile several successive frames together.
  6037. The filter accepts the following options:
  6038. @table @option
  6039. @item layout
  6040. Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
  6041. this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6042. @item nb_frames
  6043. Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
  6044. than or equal to @var{w}x@var{h}. The default value is @code{0}, meaning all
  6045. the area will be used.
  6046. @item margin
  6047. Set the outer border margin in pixels.
  6048. @item padding
  6049. Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
  6050. more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
  6051. refer to the pad video filter.
  6052. @item color
  6053. Specify the color of the unused areaFor the syntax of this option, check the
  6054. "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of @var{color}
  6055. is "black".
  6056. @end table
  6057. @subsection Examples
  6058. @itemize
  6059. @item
  6060. Produce 8x8 PNG tiles of all keyframes (@option{-skip_frame nokey}) in a movie:
  6061. @example
  6062. ffmpeg -skip_frame nokey -i file.avi -vf 'scale=128:72,tile=8x8' -an -vsync 0 keyframes%03d.png
  6063. @end example
  6064. The @option{-vsync 0} is necessary to prevent @command{ffmpeg} from
  6065. duplicating each output frame to accommodate the originally detected frame
  6066. rate.
  6067. @item
  6068. Display @code{5} pictures in an area of @code{3x2} frames,
  6069. with @code{7} pixels between them, and @code{2} pixels of initial margin, using
  6070. mixed flat and named options:
  6071. @example
  6072. tile=3x2:nb_frames=5:padding=7:margin=2
  6073. @end example
  6074. @end itemize
  6075. @section tinterlace
  6076. Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
  6077. Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
  6078. considered odd.
  6079. The filter accepts the following options:
  6080. @table @option
  6081. @item mode
  6082. Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
  6083. as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
  6084. Available values are:
  6085. @table @samp
  6086. @item merge, 0
  6087. Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
  6088. generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
  6089. @item drop_odd, 1
  6090. Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6091. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6092. @item drop_even, 2
  6093. Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
  6094. unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6095. @item pad, 3
  6096. Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
  6097. generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
  6098. @item interleave_top, 4
  6099. Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
  6100. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6101. @item interleave_bottom, 5
  6102. Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
  6103. even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
  6104. @item interlacex2, 6
  6105. Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
  6106. containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
  6107. the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
  6108. the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
  6109. field synchronisation.
  6110. @end table
  6111. Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
  6112. compatibility reasons.
  6113. Default mode is @code{merge}.
  6114. @item flags
  6115. Specify flags influencing the filter process.
  6116. Available value for @var{flags} is:
  6117. @table @option
  6118. @item low_pass_filter, vlfp
  6119. Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
  6120. Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
  6121. destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
  6122. vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace 'twitter' and Moire
  6123. patterning.
  6124. Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for @option{mode}
  6125. @var{interleave_top} and @var{interleave_bottom}.
  6126. @end table
  6127. @end table
  6128. @section transpose
  6129. Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
  6130. It accepts the following parameters:
  6131. @table @option
  6132. @item dir
  6133. Specify the transposition direction.
  6134. Can assume the following values:
  6135. @table @samp
  6136. @item 0, 4, cclock_flip
  6137. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
  6138. @example
  6139. L.R L.l
  6140. . . -> . .
  6141. l.r R.r
  6142. @end example
  6143. @item 1, 5, clock
  6144. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
  6145. @example
  6146. L.R l.L
  6147. . . -> . .
  6148. l.r r.R
  6149. @end example
  6150. @item 2, 6, cclock
  6151. Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
  6152. @example
  6153. L.R R.r
  6154. . . -> . .
  6155. l.r L.l
  6156. @end example
  6157. @item 3, 7, clock_flip
  6158. Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
  6159. @example
  6160. L.R r.R
  6161. . . -> . .
  6162. l.r l.L
  6163. @end example
  6164. @end table
  6165. For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
  6166. video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
  6167. deprecated, the @code{passthrough} option should be used instead.
  6168. Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
  6169. symbolic constants.
  6170. @item passthrough
  6171. Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
  6172. specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
  6173. @table @samp
  6174. @item none
  6175. Always apply transposition.
  6176. @item portrait
  6177. Preserve portrait geometry (when @var{height} >= @var{width}).
  6178. @item landscape
  6179. Preserve landscape geometry (when @var{width} >= @var{height}).
  6180. @end table
  6181. Default value is @code{none}.
  6182. @end table
  6183. For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
  6184. layout:
  6185. @example
  6186. transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
  6187. @end example
  6188. The command above can also be specified as:
  6189. @example
  6190. transpose=1:portrait
  6191. @end example
  6192. @section trim
  6193. Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
  6194. It accepts the following parameters:
  6195. @table @option
  6196. @item start
  6197. Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
  6198. timestamp @var{start} will be the first frame in the output.
  6199. @item end
  6200. Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
  6201. immediately preceding the one with the timestamp @var{end} will be the last
  6202. frame in the output.
  6203. @item start_pts
  6204. This is the same as @var{start}, except this option sets the start timestamp
  6205. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6206. @item end_pts
  6207. This is the same as @var{end}, except this option sets the end timestamp
  6208. in timebase units instead of seconds.
  6209. @item duration
  6210. The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
  6211. @item start_frame
  6212. The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
  6213. @item end_frame
  6214. The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
  6215. @end table
  6216. @option{start}, @option{end}, @option{duration} are expressed as time
  6217. duration specifications, check the "Time duration" section in the
  6218. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6219. Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the @option{duration}
  6220. option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
  6221. frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
  6222. the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
  6223. setpts filter after the trim filter.
  6224. If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
  6225. keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
  6226. only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
  6227. filters.
  6228. The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
  6229. just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
  6230. Examples:
  6231. @itemize
  6232. @item
  6233. Drop everything except the second minute of input:
  6234. @example
  6235. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
  6236. @end example
  6237. @item
  6238. Keep only the first second:
  6239. @example
  6240. ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
  6241. @end example
  6242. @end itemize
  6243. @section unsharp
  6244. Sharpen or blur the input video.
  6245. It accepts the following parameters:
  6246. @table @option
  6247. @item luma_msize_x, lx
  6248. Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
  6249. 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6250. @item luma_msize_y, ly
  6251. Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
  6252. and 63. The default value is 5.
  6253. @item luma_amount, la
  6254. Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6255. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6256. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6257. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6258. Default value is 1.0.
  6259. @item chroma_msize_x, cx
  6260. Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
  6261. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6262. @item chroma_msize_y, cy
  6263. Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
  6264. between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
  6265. @item chroma_amount, ca
  6266. Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
  6267. values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
  6268. Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
  6269. sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
  6270. Default value is 0.0.
  6271. @item opencl
  6272. If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
  6273. FFmpeg was configured with @code{--enable-opencl}. Default value is 0.
  6274. @end table
  6275. All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
  6276. string '5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0'.
  6277. @subsection Examples
  6278. @itemize
  6279. @item
  6280. Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
  6281. @example
  6282. unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
  6283. @end example
  6284. @item
  6285. Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
  6286. @example
  6287. unsharp=7:7:-2:7:7:-2
  6288. @end example
  6289. @end itemize
  6290. @anchor{vidstabdetect}
  6291. @section vidstabdetect
  6292. Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
  6293. @ref{vidstabtransform} for pass 2.
  6294. This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
  6295. transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
  6296. the @ref{vidstabtransform} filter.
  6297. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6298. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6299. This filter accepts the following options:
  6300. @table @option
  6301. @item result
  6302. Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
  6303. Default value is @file{transforms.trf}.
  6304. @item shakiness
  6305. Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
  6306. integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
  6307. value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
  6308. @item accuracy
  6309. Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
  6310. range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
  6311. accuracy. Default value is 15.
  6312. @item stepsize
  6313. Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
  6314. scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
  6315. @item mincontrast
  6316. Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
  6317. discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
  6318. value is 0.3.
  6319. @item tripod
  6320. Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
  6321. If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
  6322. in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
  6323. is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
  6324. the camera view absolutely still.
  6325. If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
  6326. @item show
  6327. Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
  6328. integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
  6329. visualization.
  6330. @end table
  6331. @subsection Examples
  6332. @itemize
  6333. @item
  6334. Use default values:
  6335. @example
  6336. vidstabdetect
  6337. @end example
  6338. @item
  6339. Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
  6340. @file{mytransforms.trf}:
  6341. @example
  6342. vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
  6343. @end example
  6344. @item
  6345. Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
  6346. video:
  6347. @example
  6348. vidstabdetect=show=1
  6349. @end example
  6350. @item
  6351. Analyze a video with medium shakiness using @command{ffmpeg}:
  6352. @example
  6353. ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
  6354. @end example
  6355. @end itemize
  6356. @anchor{vidstabtransform}
  6357. @section vidstabtransform
  6358. Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
  6359. see @ref{vidstabdetect} for pass 1.
  6360. Read a file with transform information for each frame and
  6361. apply/compensate them. Together with the @ref{vidstabdetect}
  6362. filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
  6363. @url{http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab}. It is important to also use
  6364. the unsharp filter, see below.
  6365. To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
  6366. @code{--enable-libvidstab}.
  6367. @subsection Options
  6368. @table @option
  6369. @item input
  6370. Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
  6371. @file{transforms.trf}).
  6372. @item smoothing
  6373. Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
  6374. camera movements. Default value is 10.
  6375. For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
  6376. past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
  6377. larger values leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration
  6378. of the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a
  6379. static camera is simulated.
  6380. @item optalgo
  6381. Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
  6382. Accepted values are:
  6383. @table @samp
  6384. @item gauss
  6385. gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
  6386. @item avg
  6387. averaging on transformations
  6388. @end table
  6389. @item maxshift
  6390. Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
  6391. meaning no limit.
  6392. @item maxangle
  6393. Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
  6394. value is -1, meaning no limit.
  6395. @item crop
  6396. Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
  6397. compensation.
  6398. Available values are:
  6399. @table @samp
  6400. @item keep
  6401. keep image information from previous frame (default)
  6402. @item black
  6403. fill the border black
  6404. @end table
  6405. @item invert
  6406. Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
  6407. @item relative
  6408. Consider transforms as relative to previsou frame if set to 1,
  6409. absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
  6410. @item zoom
  6411. Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
  6412. effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
  6413. zoom).
  6414. @item optzoom
  6415. Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
  6416. Accepted values are:
  6417. @table @samp
  6418. @item 0
  6419. disabled
  6420. @item 1
  6421. optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
  6422. will lead to visible borders) (default)
  6423. @item 2
  6424. optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
  6425. visible), see @option{zoomspeed}
  6426. @end table
  6427. Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
  6428. @item zoomspeed
  6429. Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
  6430. @option{optzoom} is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
  6431. 0.25.
  6432. @item interpol
  6433. Specify type of interpolation.
  6434. Available values are:
  6435. @table @samp
  6436. @item no
  6437. no interpolation
  6438. @item linear
  6439. linear only horizontal
  6440. @item bilinear
  6441. linear in both directions (default)
  6442. @item bicubic
  6443. cubic in both directions (slow)
  6444. @end table
  6445. @item tripod
  6446. Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
  6447. @code{relative=0:smoothing=0}. Default value is 0.
  6448. Use also @code{tripod} option of @ref{vidstabdetect}.
  6449. @item debug
  6450. Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
  6451. are written to the temporary file @file{global_motions.trf}. Default
  6452. value is 0.
  6453. @end table
  6454. @subsection Examples
  6455. @itemize
  6456. @item
  6457. Use @command{ffmpeg} for a typical stabilization with default values:
  6458. @example
  6459. ffmpeg -i inp.mpeg -vf vidstabtransform,unsharp=5:5:0.8:3:3:0.4 inp_stabilized.mpeg
  6460. @end example
  6461. Note the use of the unsharp filter which is always recommended.
  6462. @item
  6463. Zoom in a bit more and load transform data from a given file:
  6464. @example
  6465. vidstabtransform=zoom=5:input="mytransforms.trf"
  6466. @end example
  6467. @item
  6468. Smoothen the video even more:
  6469. @example
  6470. vidstabtransform=smoothing=30
  6471. @end example
  6472. @end itemize
  6473. @section vflip
  6474. Flip the input video vertically.
  6475. For example, to vertically flip a video with @command{ffmpeg}:
  6476. @example
  6477. ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
  6478. @end example
  6479. @section vignette
  6480. Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
  6481. The filter accepts the following options:
  6482. @table @option
  6483. @item angle, a
  6484. Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
  6485. The value is clipped in the @code{[0,PI/2]} range.
  6486. Default value: @code{"PI/5"}
  6487. @item x0
  6488. @item y0
  6489. Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively @code{"w/2"} and @code{"h/2"}
  6490. by default.
  6491. @item mode
  6492. Set forward/backward mode.
  6493. Available modes are:
  6494. @table @samp
  6495. @item forward
  6496. The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
  6497. @item backward
  6498. The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
  6499. This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
  6500. detection to extract the lens @option{angle} and other settings (yet). It can
  6501. also be used to create a burning effect.
  6502. @end table
  6503. Default value is @samp{forward}.
  6504. @item eval
  6505. Set evaluation mode for the expressions (@option{angle}, @option{x0}, @option{y0}).
  6506. It accepts the following values:
  6507. @table @samp
  6508. @item init
  6509. Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
  6510. @item frame
  6511. Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
  6512. @samp{init} mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
  6513. allows advanced dynamic expressions.
  6514. @end table
  6515. Default value is @samp{init}.
  6516. @item dither
  6517. Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is @code{1}
  6518. (enabled).
  6519. @item aspect
  6520. Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
  6521. Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
  6522. following the dimensions of the video.
  6523. Default is @code{1/1}.
  6524. @end table
  6525. @subsection Expressions
  6526. The @option{alpha}, @option{x0} and @option{y0} expressions can contain the
  6527. following parameters.
  6528. @table @option
  6529. @item w
  6530. @item h
  6531. input width and height
  6532. @item n
  6533. the number of input frame, starting from 0
  6534. @item pts
  6535. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
  6536. @var{TB} units, NAN if undefined
  6537. @item r
  6538. frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
  6539. @item t
  6540. the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  6541. expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
  6542. @item tb
  6543. time base of the input video
  6544. @end table
  6545. @subsection Examples
  6546. @itemize
  6547. @item
  6548. Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
  6549. @example
  6550. vignette=PI/4
  6551. @end example
  6552. @item
  6553. Make a flickering vignetting:
  6554. @example
  6555. vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
  6556. @end example
  6557. @end itemize
  6558. @section w3fdif
  6559. Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
  6560. Deinterlacing Filter").
  6561. Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
  6562. implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
  6563. Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
  6564. uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
  6565. There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
  6566. and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
  6567. be set by passing an optional parameter:
  6568. @table @option
  6569. @item filter
  6570. Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
  6571. @table @samp
  6572. @item simple
  6573. Simple filter coefficient set.
  6574. @item complex
  6575. More-complex filter coefficient set.
  6576. @end table
  6577. Default value is @samp{complex}.
  6578. @item deint
  6579. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
  6580. @table @samp
  6581. @item all
  6582. Deinterlace all frames,
  6583. @item interlaced
  6584. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  6585. @end table
  6586. Default value is @samp{all}.
  6587. @end table
  6588. @anchor{yadif}
  6589. @section yadif
  6590. Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
  6591. filter").
  6592. It accepts the following parameters:
  6593. @table @option
  6594. @item mode
  6595. The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
  6596. @table @option
  6597. @item 0, send_frame
  6598. Output one frame for each frame.
  6599. @item 1, send_field
  6600. Output one frame for each field.
  6601. @item 2, send_frame_nospatial
  6602. Like @code{send_frame}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  6603. @item 3, send_field_nospatial
  6604. Like @code{send_field}, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
  6605. @end table
  6606. The default value is @code{send_frame}.
  6607. @item parity
  6608. The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
  6609. of the following values:
  6610. @table @option
  6611. @item 0, tff
  6612. Assume the top field is first.
  6613. @item 1, bff
  6614. Assume the bottom field is first.
  6615. @item -1, auto
  6616. Enable automatic detection of field parity.
  6617. @end table
  6618. The default value is @code{auto}.
  6619. If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
  6620. top field first will be assumed.
  6621. @item deint
  6622. Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
  6623. values:
  6624. @table @option
  6625. @item 0, all
  6626. Deinterlace all frames.
  6627. @item 1, interlaced
  6628. Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
  6629. @end table
  6630. The default value is @code{all}.
  6631. @end table
  6632. @section zoompan
  6633. Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
  6634. This filter accepts the following options:
  6635. @table @option
  6636. @item zoom, z
  6637. Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
  6638. @item x
  6639. @item y
  6640. Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
  6641. @item d
  6642. Set the duration expression in number of frames.
  6643. This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
  6644. single input image.
  6645. @item s
  6646. Set the output image size, default is 'hd720'.
  6647. @end table
  6648. Each expression can contain the following constants:
  6649. @table @option
  6650. @item in_w, iw
  6651. Input width.
  6652. @item in_h, ih
  6653. Input height.
  6654. @item out_w, ow
  6655. Output width.
  6656. @item out_h, oh
  6657. Output height.
  6658. @item in
  6659. Input frame count.
  6660. @item on
  6661. Output frame count.
  6662. @item x
  6663. @item y
  6664. Last calculated 'x' and 'y' position from 'x' and 'y' expression
  6665. for current input frame.
  6666. @item px
  6667. @item py
  6668. 'x' and 'y' of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
  6669. not yet such frame (first input frame).
  6670. @item zoom
  6671. Last calculated zoom from 'z' expression for current input frame.
  6672. @item pzoom
  6673. Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
  6674. @item duration
  6675. Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from 'd' expression
  6676. for each input frame.
  6677. @item pduration
  6678. number of output frames created for previous input frame
  6679. @item a
  6680. Rational number: input width / input height
  6681. @item sar
  6682. sample aspect ratio
  6683. @item dar
  6684. display aspect ratio
  6685. @end table
  6686. @subsection Examples
  6687. @itemize
  6688. @item
  6689. Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
  6690. @example
  6691. zoompan=z=min(zoom+0.0015\,1.5):d=700:x=if(gte(zoom\,1.5)\,x\,x+1/a):y=if(gte(zoom\,1.5)\,y\,y+1):s=640x360"
  6692. @end example
  6693. @end itemize
  6694. @c man end VIDEO FILTERS
  6695. @chapter Video Sources
  6696. @c man begin VIDEO SOURCES
  6697. Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
  6698. @section buffer
  6699. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
  6700. This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
  6701. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h}.
  6702. It accepts the following parameters:
  6703. @table @option
  6704. @item video_size
  6705. Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
  6706. syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
  6707. manual.
  6708. @item width
  6709. The input video width.
  6710. @item height
  6711. The input video height.
  6712. @item pix_fmt
  6713. A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
  6714. It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
  6715. name.
  6716. @item time_base
  6717. Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
  6718. @item frame_rate
  6719. Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
  6720. @item pixel_aspect, sar
  6721. The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
  6722. @item sws_param
  6723. Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
  6724. is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
  6725. input size or format.
  6726. @end table
  6727. For example:
  6728. @example
  6729. buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
  6730. @end example
  6731. will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
  6732. with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
  6733. square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
  6734. Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
  6735. (check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in @file{libavutil/pixfmt.h}),
  6736. this example corresponds to:
  6737. @example
  6738. buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
  6739. @end example
  6740. Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
  6741. syntax is deprecated:
  6742. @var{width}:@var{height}:@var{pix_fmt}:@var{time_base.num}:@var{time_base.den}:@var{pixel_aspect.num}:@var{pixel_aspect.den}[:@var{sws_param}]
  6743. @section cellauto
  6744. Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
  6745. The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
  6746. @option{filename}, and @option{pattern} options. If such options are
  6747. not specified an initial state is created randomly.
  6748. At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
  6749. the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
  6750. frame is filled is defined by the @option{scroll} option.
  6751. This source accepts the following options:
  6752. @table @option
  6753. @item filename, f
  6754. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  6755. the specified file.
  6756. In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
  6757. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  6758. file will be ignored.
  6759. @item pattern, p
  6760. Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
  6761. the specified string.
  6762. Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
  6763. cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
  6764. string will be ignored.
  6765. @item rate, r
  6766. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  6767. Default is 25.
  6768. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  6769. Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
  6770. is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
  6771. 1/PHI.
  6772. This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
  6773. @item random_seed, seed
  6774. Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
  6775. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  6776. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  6777. effort basis.
  6778. @item rule
  6779. Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
  6780. Default value is 110.
  6781. @item size, s
  6782. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
  6783. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6784. If @option{filename} or @option{pattern} is specified, the size is set
  6785. by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
  6786. height is set to @var{width} * PHI.
  6787. If @option{size} is set, it must contain the width of the specified
  6788. pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
  6789. larger row.
  6790. If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
  6791. defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
  6792. @item scroll
  6793. If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
  6794. have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
  6795. written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
  6796. Defaults to 1.
  6797. @item start_full, full
  6798. If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
  6799. outputting the first frame.
  6800. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  6801. @item stitch
  6802. If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
  6803. This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
  6804. @end table
  6805. @subsection Examples
  6806. @itemize
  6807. @item
  6808. Read the initial state from @file{pattern}, and specify an output of
  6809. size 200x400.
  6810. @example
  6811. cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
  6812. @end example
  6813. @item
  6814. Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
  6815. ratio of 2/3:
  6816. @example
  6817. cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  6818. @end example
  6819. @item
  6820. Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
  6821. centered on an initial row with width 100:
  6822. @example
  6823. cellauto=p=@@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  6824. @end example
  6825. @item
  6826. Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
  6827. @example
  6828. cellauto=p='@@@@ @@ @@@@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
  6829. @end example
  6830. @end itemize
  6831. @section mandelbrot
  6832. Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
  6833. point specified with @var{start_x} and @var{start_y}.
  6834. This source accepts the following options:
  6835. @table @option
  6836. @item end_pts
  6837. Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
  6838. @item end_scale
  6839. Set the terminal scale value.
  6840. Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
  6841. @item inner
  6842. Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
  6843. Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
  6844. It shall assume one of the following values:
  6845. @table @option
  6846. @item black
  6847. Set black mode.
  6848. @item convergence
  6849. Show time until convergence.
  6850. @item mincol
  6851. Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
  6852. @item period
  6853. Set period mode.
  6854. @end table
  6855. Default value is @var{mincol}.
  6856. @item bailout
  6857. Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
  6858. @item maxiter
  6859. Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
  6860. algorithm. Default value is 7189.
  6861. @item outer
  6862. Set outer coloring mode.
  6863. It shall assume one of following values:
  6864. @table @option
  6865. @item iteration_count
  6866. Set iteration cound mode.
  6867. @item normalized_iteration_count
  6868. set normalized iteration count mode.
  6869. @end table
  6870. Default value is @var{normalized_iteration_count}.
  6871. @item rate, r
  6872. Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
  6873. value is "25".
  6874. @item size, s
  6875. Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
  6876. size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
  6877. @item start_scale
  6878. Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
  6879. @item start_x
  6880. Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
  6881. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
  6882. @item start_y
  6883. Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
  6884. -100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
  6885. @end table
  6886. @section mptestsrc
  6887. Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
  6888. The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
  6889. This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
  6890. This source accepts the following options:
  6891. @table @option
  6892. @item rate, r
  6893. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  6894. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  6895. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  6896. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  6897. "25".
  6898. @item duration, d
  6899. Set the video duration of the sourced video. The accepted syntax is:
  6900. @example
  6901. [-]HH:MM:SS[.m...]
  6902. [-]S+[.m...]
  6903. @end example
  6904. See also the function @code{av_parse_time()}.
  6905. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  6906. supposed to be generated forever.
  6907. @item test, t
  6908. Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
  6909. @table @option
  6910. @item dc_luma
  6911. @item dc_chroma
  6912. @item freq_luma
  6913. @item freq_chroma
  6914. @item amp_luma
  6915. @item amp_chroma
  6916. @item cbp
  6917. @item mv
  6918. @item ring1
  6919. @item ring2
  6920. @item all
  6921. @end table
  6922. Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
  6923. @end table
  6924. Some examples:
  6925. @example
  6926. testsrc=t=dc_luma
  6927. @end example
  6928. will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
  6929. @section frei0r_src
  6930. Provide a frei0r source.
  6931. To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
  6932. header and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-frei0r}.
  6933. This source accepts the following parameters:
  6934. @table @option
  6935. @item size
  6936. The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
  6937. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  6938. @item framerate
  6939. The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
  6940. @var{num}/@var{den} or a frame rate abbreviation.
  6941. @item filter_name
  6942. The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
  6943. how to set the parameters, read the @ref{frei0r} section in the video filters
  6944. documentation.
  6945. @item filter_params
  6946. A '|'-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
  6947. @end table
  6948. For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
  6949. and frame rate 10 which is overlayed on the overlay filter main input:
  6950. @example
  6951. frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
  6952. @end example
  6953. @section life
  6954. Generate a life pattern.
  6955. This source is based on a generalization of John Conway's life game.
  6956. The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
  6957. which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
  6958. interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
  6959. horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
  6960. At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
  6961. which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
  6962. cell stay alive or born. The @option{rule} option allows one to specify
  6963. the rule to adopt.
  6964. This source accepts the following options:
  6965. @table @option
  6966. @item filename, f
  6967. Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
  6968. each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
  6969. is used to delimit the end of each row.
  6970. If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
  6971. randomly.
  6972. @item rate, r
  6973. Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
  6974. Default is 25.
  6975. @item random_fill_ratio, ratio
  6976. Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
  6977. floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
  6978. It is ignored when a file is specified.
  6979. @item random_seed, seed
  6980. Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
  6981. included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
  6982. set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
  6983. effort basis.
  6984. @item rule
  6985. Set the life rule.
  6986. A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "S@var{NS}/B@var{NB}",
  6987. where @var{NS} and @var{NB} are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
  6988. @var{NS} specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
  6989. live cell stay alive, and @var{NB} the number of alive neighbor cells
  6990. which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
  6991. "s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
  6992. Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
  6993. high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
  6994. for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
  6995. the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
  6996. higher number of neighbor cells.
  6997. For example the number 6153 = @code{(12<<9)+9} specifies a stay alive
  6998. rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
  6999. Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway's game of life
  7000. rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
  7001. cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
  7002. a dead cell.
  7003. @item size, s
  7004. Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7005. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7006. If @option{filename} is specified, the size is set by default to the
  7007. same size of the input file. If @option{size} is set, it must contain
  7008. the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
  7009. that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
  7010. If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
  7011. (used for a randomly generated initial grid).
  7012. @item stitch
  7013. If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
  7014. top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
  7015. @item mold
  7016. Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from @option{death_color} to
  7017. @option{mold_color} with a step of @option{mold}. @option{mold} can have a
  7018. value from 0 to 255.
  7019. @item life_color
  7020. Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
  7021. @item death_color
  7022. Set the color of dead cells. If @option{mold} is set, this is the first color
  7023. used to represent a dead cell.
  7024. @item mold_color
  7025. Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
  7026. For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
  7027. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7028. @end table
  7029. @subsection Examples
  7030. @itemize
  7031. @item
  7032. Read a grid from @file{pattern}, and center it on a grid of size
  7033. 300x300 pixels:
  7034. @example
  7035. life=f=pattern:s=300x300
  7036. @end example
  7037. @item
  7038. Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
  7039. @example
  7040. life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
  7041. @end example
  7042. @item
  7043. Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
  7044. @example
  7045. life=rule=S14/B34
  7046. @end example
  7047. @item
  7048. Full example with slow death effect (mold) using @command{ffplay}:
  7049. @example
  7050. ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
  7051. @end example
  7052. @end itemize
  7053. @anchor{color}
  7054. @anchor{haldclutsrc}
  7055. @anchor{nullsrc}
  7056. @anchor{rgbtestsrc}
  7057. @anchor{smptebars}
  7058. @anchor{smptehdbars}
  7059. @anchor{testsrc}
  7060. @section color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc
  7061. The @code{color} source provides an uniformly colored input.
  7062. The @code{haldclutsrc} source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
  7063. @ref{haldclut} filter.
  7064. The @code{nullsrc} source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
  7065. mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
  7066. source for filters which ignore the input data.
  7067. The @code{rgbtestsrc} source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
  7068. detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
  7069. stripe from top to bottom.
  7070. The @code{smptebars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7071. the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
  7072. The @code{smptehdbars} source generates a color bars pattern, based on
  7073. the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
  7074. The @code{testsrc} source generates a test video pattern, showing a
  7075. color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
  7076. intended for testing purposes.
  7077. The sources accept the following parameters:
  7078. @table @option
  7079. @item color, c
  7080. Specify the color of the source, only available in the @code{color}
  7081. source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
  7082. ffmpeg-utils manual.
  7083. @item level
  7084. Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the @code{haldclutsrc}
  7085. source. A level of @code{N} generates a picture of @code{N*N*N} by @code{N*N*N}
  7086. pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
  7087. coded on a @code{1/(N*N)} scale.
  7088. @item size, s
  7089. Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
  7090. "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
  7091. "320x240".
  7092. This option is not available with the @code{haldclutsrc} filter.
  7093. @item rate, r
  7094. Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
  7095. generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
  7096. @var{frame_rate_num}/@var{frame_rate_den}, an integer number, a floating point
  7097. number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
  7098. "25".
  7099. @item sar
  7100. Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
  7101. @item duration, d
  7102. Set the video duration of the sourced video. The accepted syntax is:
  7103. @example
  7104. [-]HH[:MM[:SS[.m...]]]
  7105. [-]S+[.m...]
  7106. @end example
  7107. Also see the the @code{av_parse_time()} function.
  7108. If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
  7109. supposed to be generated forever.
  7110. @item decimals, n
  7111. Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
  7112. @code{testsrc} source.
  7113. The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
  7114. timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
  7115. value. Default value is 0.
  7116. @end table
  7117. For example the following:
  7118. @example
  7119. testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
  7120. @end example
  7121. will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
  7122. 176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
  7123. The following graph description will generate a red source
  7124. with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
  7125. frames per second.
  7126. @example
  7127. color=c=red@@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
  7128. @end example
  7129. If the input content is to be ignored, @code{nullsrc} can be used. The
  7130. following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
  7131. the @code{geq} filter:
  7132. @example
  7133. nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
  7134. @end example
  7135. @subsection Commands
  7136. The @code{color} source supports the following commands:
  7137. @table @option
  7138. @item c, color
  7139. Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
  7140. corresponding @option{color} option.
  7141. @end table
  7142. @c man end VIDEO SOURCES
  7143. @chapter Video Sinks
  7144. @c man begin VIDEO SINKS
  7145. Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
  7146. @section buffersink
  7147. Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
  7148. graph.
  7149. This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
  7150. through the interface defined in @file{libavfilter/buffersink.h}
  7151. or the options system.
  7152. It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
  7153. defines the incoming buffers' formats, to be passed as the opaque
  7154. parameter to @code{avfilter_init_filter} for initialization.
  7155. @section nullsink
  7156. Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
  7157. mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
  7158. tools.
  7159. @c man end VIDEO SINKS
  7160. @chapter Multimedia Filters
  7161. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  7162. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
  7163. @section avectorscope
  7164. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
  7165. scope.
  7166. The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
  7167. audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
  7168. signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
  7169. as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
  7170. If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
  7171. indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
  7172. The filter accepts the following options:
  7173. @table @option
  7174. @item mode, m
  7175. Set the vectorscope mode.
  7176. Available values are:
  7177. @table @samp
  7178. @item lissajous
  7179. Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
  7180. @item lissajous_xy
  7181. Same as above but not rotated.
  7182. @end table
  7183. Default value is @samp{lissajous}.
  7184. @item size, s
  7185. Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
  7186. section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is @code{400x400}.
  7187. @item rate, r
  7188. Set the output frame rate. Default value is @code{25}.
  7189. @item rc
  7190. @item gc
  7191. @item bc
  7192. Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are @code{40}, @code{160} and @code{80}.
  7193. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7194. @item rf
  7195. @item gf
  7196. @item bf
  7197. Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are @code{15}, @code{10} and @code{5}.
  7198. Allowed range is @code{[0, 255]}.
  7199. @item zoom
  7200. Set the zoom factor. Default value is @code{1}. Allowed range is @code{[1, 10]}.
  7201. @end table
  7202. @subsection Examples
  7203. @itemize
  7204. @item
  7205. Complete example using @command{ffplay}:
  7206. @example
  7207. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7208. [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
  7209. @end example
  7210. @end itemize
  7211. @section concat
  7212. Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
  7213. other.
  7214. The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
  7215. segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
  7216. also be the number of streams at output.
  7217. The filter accepts the following options:
  7218. @table @option
  7219. @item n
  7220. Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
  7221. @item v
  7222. Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
  7223. streams in each segment. Default is 1.
  7224. @item a
  7225. Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
  7226. streams in each segment. Default is 0.
  7227. @item unsafe
  7228. Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
  7229. @end table
  7230. The filter has @var{v}+@var{a} outputs: first @var{v} video outputs, then
  7231. @var{a} audio outputs.
  7232. There are @var{n}x(@var{v}+@var{a}) inputs: first the inputs for the first
  7233. segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
  7234. segment, etc.
  7235. Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
  7236. reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
  7237. related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
  7238. concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
  7239. stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
  7240. audio streams with silence.
  7241. For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
  7242. All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
  7243. filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
  7244. streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
  7245. audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
  7246. explicitly by the user.
  7247. Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
  7248. at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
  7249. @subsection Examples
  7250. @itemize
  7251. @item
  7252. Concatenate an opening, an episode and an ending, all in bilingual version
  7253. (video in stream 0, audio in streams 1 and 2):
  7254. @example
  7255. ffmpeg -i opening.mkv -i episode.mkv -i ending.mkv -filter_complex \
  7256. '[0:0] [0:1] [0:2] [1:0] [1:1] [1:2] [2:0] [2:1] [2:2]
  7257. concat=n=3:v=1:a=2 [v] [a1] [a2]' \
  7258. -map '[v]' -map '[a1]' -map '[a2]' output.mkv
  7259. @end example
  7260. @item
  7261. Concatenate two parts, handling audio and video separately, using the
  7262. (a)movie sources, and adjusting the resolution:
  7263. @example
  7264. movie=part1.mp4, scale=512:288 [v1] ; amovie=part1.mp4 [a1] ;
  7265. movie=part2.mp4, scale=512:288 [v2] ; amovie=part2.mp4 [a2] ;
  7266. [v1] [v2] concat [outv] ; [a1] [a2] concat=v=0:a=1 [outa]
  7267. @end example
  7268. Note that a desync will happen at the stitch if the audio and video streams
  7269. do not have exactly the same duration in the first file.
  7270. @end itemize
  7271. @section ebur128
  7272. EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
  7273. it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
  7274. Momentary loudness (identified by @code{M}), Short-term loudness (@code{S}),
  7275. Integrated loudness (@code{I}) and Loudness Range (@code{LRA}).
  7276. The filter also has a video output (see the @var{video} option) with a real
  7277. time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
  7278. message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
  7279. unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
  7280. short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
  7281. the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
  7282. More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
  7283. @url{http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness}.
  7284. The filter accepts the following options:
  7285. @table @option
  7286. @item video
  7287. Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
  7288. option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
  7289. activated. Default is @code{0}.
  7290. @item size
  7291. Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
  7292. option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
  7293. and minimum resolution is @code{640x480}.
  7294. @item meter
  7295. Set the EBU scale meter. Default is @code{9}. Common values are @code{9} and
  7296. @code{18}, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
  7297. other integer value between this range is allowed.
  7298. @item metadata
  7299. Set metadata injection. If set to @code{1}, the audio input will be segmented
  7300. into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
  7301. in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with @code{lavfi.r128.}.
  7302. Default is @code{0}.
  7303. @item framelog
  7304. Force the frame logging level.
  7305. Available values are:
  7306. @table @samp
  7307. @item info
  7308. information logging level
  7309. @item verbose
  7310. verbose logging level
  7311. @end table
  7312. By default, the logging level is set to @var{info}. If the @option{video} or
  7313. the @option{metadata} options are set, it switches to @var{verbose}.
  7314. @item peak
  7315. Set peak mode(s).
  7316. Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a @code{flag} type). Possible
  7317. values are:
  7318. @table @samp
  7319. @item none
  7320. Disable any peak mode (default).
  7321. @item sample
  7322. Enable sample-peak mode.
  7323. Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
  7324. for sample-peak (identified by @code{SPK}).
  7325. @item true
  7326. Enable true-peak mode.
  7327. If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
  7328. stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
  7329. (identified by @code{TPK}) and true-peak per frame (identified by @code{FTPK}).
  7330. This mode requires a build with @code{libswresample}.
  7331. @end table
  7332. @end table
  7333. @subsection Examples
  7334. @itemize
  7335. @item
  7336. Real-time graph using @command{ffplay}, with a EBU scale meter +18:
  7337. @example
  7338. ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
  7339. @end example
  7340. @item
  7341. Run an analysis with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7342. @example
  7343. ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
  7344. @end example
  7345. @end itemize
  7346. @section interleave, ainterleave
  7347. Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
  7348. @code{interleave} works with video inputs, @code{ainterleave} with audio.
  7349. These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
  7350. queued frame to the output.
  7351. Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
  7352. timestamp values.
  7353. In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
  7354. at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
  7355. input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
  7356. For example consider the case when one input is a @code{select} filter
  7357. which always drop input frames. The @code{interleave} filter will keep
  7358. reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
  7359. to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
  7360. Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
  7361. frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
  7362. the queue is already filled.
  7363. These filters accept the following options:
  7364. @table @option
  7365. @item nb_inputs, n
  7366. Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
  7367. @end table
  7368. @subsection Examples
  7369. @itemize
  7370. @item
  7371. Interleave frames belonging to different streams using @command{ffmpeg}:
  7372. @example
  7373. ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
  7374. @end example
  7375. @item
  7376. Add flickering blur effect:
  7377. @example
  7378. select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
  7379. @end example
  7380. @end itemize
  7381. @section perms, aperms
  7382. Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
  7383. These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
  7384. following filter in the filtergraph.
  7385. The filters accept the following options:
  7386. @table @option
  7387. @item mode
  7388. Select the permissions mode.
  7389. It accepts the following values:
  7390. @table @samp
  7391. @item none
  7392. Do nothing. This is the default.
  7393. @item ro
  7394. Set all the output frames read-only.
  7395. @item rw
  7396. Set all the output frames directly writable.
  7397. @item toggle
  7398. Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
  7399. @item random
  7400. Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
  7401. @end table
  7402. @item seed
  7403. Set the seed for the @var{random} mode, must be an integer included between
  7404. @code{0} and @code{UINT32_MAX}. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
  7405. @code{-1}, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
  7406. basis.
  7407. @end table
  7408. Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
  7409. following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
  7410. following filter. Inserting a @ref{format} or @ref{aformat} filter before the
  7411. perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
  7412. @section select, aselect
  7413. Select frames to pass in output.
  7414. This filter accepts the following options:
  7415. @table @option
  7416. @item expr, e
  7417. Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
  7418. If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
  7419. If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
  7420. first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
  7421. @code{ceil(val)-1}, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
  7422. For example a value of @code{1.2} corresponds to the output with index
  7423. @code{ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1}, that is the second output.
  7424. @item outputs, n
  7425. Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
  7426. frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
  7427. @end table
  7428. The expression can contain the following constants:
  7429. @table @option
  7430. @item n
  7431. The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
  7432. @item selected_n
  7433. The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
  7434. @item prev_selected_n
  7435. The sequential number of the last selected frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7436. @item TB
  7437. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  7438. @item pts
  7439. The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
  7440. expressed in @var{TB} units. It's NAN if undefined.
  7441. @item t
  7442. The PTS of the filtered video frame,
  7443. expressed in seconds. It's NAN if undefined.
  7444. @item prev_pts
  7445. The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7446. @item prev_selected_pts
  7447. The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7448. @item prev_selected_t
  7449. The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It's NAN if undefined.
  7450. @item start_pts
  7451. The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  7452. @item start_t
  7453. The time of the first video frame in the video. It's NAN if undefined.
  7454. @item pict_type @emph{(video only)}
  7455. The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
  7456. values:
  7457. @table @option
  7458. @item I
  7459. @item P
  7460. @item B
  7461. @item S
  7462. @item SI
  7463. @item SP
  7464. @item BI
  7465. @end table
  7466. @item interlace_type @emph{(video only)}
  7467. The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
  7468. @table @option
  7469. @item PROGRESSIVE
  7470. The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
  7471. @item TOPFIRST
  7472. The frame is top-field-first.
  7473. @item BOTTOMFIRST
  7474. The frame is bottom-field-first.
  7475. @end table
  7476. @item consumed_sample_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7477. the number of selected samples before the current frame
  7478. @item samples_n @emph{(audio only)}
  7479. the number of samples in the current frame
  7480. @item sample_rate @emph{(audio only)}
  7481. the input sample rate
  7482. @item key
  7483. This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
  7484. @item pos
  7485. the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
  7486. is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
  7487. @item scene @emph{(video only)}
  7488. value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
  7489. probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
  7490. value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
  7491. @end table
  7492. The default value of the select expression is "1".
  7493. @subsection Examples
  7494. @itemize
  7495. @item
  7496. Select all frames in input:
  7497. @example
  7498. select
  7499. @end example
  7500. The example above is the same as:
  7501. @example
  7502. select=1
  7503. @end example
  7504. @item
  7505. Skip all frames:
  7506. @example
  7507. select=0
  7508. @end example
  7509. @item
  7510. Select only I-frames:
  7511. @example
  7512. select='eq(pict_type\,I)'
  7513. @end example
  7514. @item
  7515. Select one frame every 100:
  7516. @example
  7517. select='not(mod(n\,100))'
  7518. @end example
  7519. @item
  7520. Select only frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7521. @example
  7522. select=between(t\,10\,20)
  7523. @end example
  7524. @item
  7525. Select only I frames contained in the 10-20 time interval:
  7526. @example
  7527. select=between(t\,10\,20)*eq(pict_type\,I)
  7528. @end example
  7529. @item
  7530. Select frames with a minimum distance of 10 seconds:
  7531. @example
  7532. select='isnan(prev_selected_t)+gte(t-prev_selected_t\,10)'
  7533. @end example
  7534. @item
  7535. Use aselect to select only audio frames with samples number > 100:
  7536. @example
  7537. aselect='gt(samples_n\,100)'
  7538. @end example
  7539. @item
  7540. Create a mosaic of the first scenes:
  7541. @example
  7542. ffmpeg -i video.avi -vf select='gt(scene\,0.4)',scale=160:120,tile -frames:v 1 preview.png
  7543. @end example
  7544. Comparing @var{scene} against a value between 0.3 and 0.5 is generally a sane
  7545. choice.
  7546. @item
  7547. Send even and odd frames to separate outputs, and compose them:
  7548. @example
  7549. select=n=2:e='mod(n, 2)+1' [odd][even]; [odd] pad=h=2*ih [tmp]; [tmp][even] overlay=y=h
  7550. @end example
  7551. @end itemize
  7552. @section sendcmd, asendcmd
  7553. Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
  7554. These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
  7555. filtergraph.
  7556. @code{sendcmd} must be inserted between two video filters,
  7557. @code{asendcmd} must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
  7558. from that they act the same way.
  7559. The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
  7560. with the @var{commands} option, or in a file specified by the
  7561. @var{filename} option.
  7562. These filters accept the following options:
  7563. @table @option
  7564. @item commands, c
  7565. Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
  7566. @item filename, f
  7567. Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
  7568. filters.
  7569. @end table
  7570. @subsection Commands syntax
  7571. A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
  7572. specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
  7573. particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
  7574. is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
  7575. interval.
  7576. An interval is specified by the following syntax:
  7577. @example
  7578. @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS};
  7579. @end example
  7580. The time interval is specified by the @var{START} and @var{END} times.
  7581. @var{END} is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
  7582. The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
  7583. it is included in the interval [@var{START}, @var{END}), that is when
  7584. the time is greater or equal to @var{START} and is lesser than
  7585. @var{END}.
  7586. @var{COMMANDS} consists of a sequence of one or more command
  7587. specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
  7588. syntax of a command specification is given by:
  7589. @example
  7590. [@var{FLAGS}] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} @var{ARG}
  7591. @end example
  7592. @var{FLAGS} is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
  7593. the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
  7594. be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
  7595. enclosed between "[" and "]".
  7596. The following flags are recognized:
  7597. @table @option
  7598. @item enter
  7599. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
  7600. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  7601. previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
  7602. current is.
  7603. @item leave
  7604. The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
  7605. specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
  7606. previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
  7607. current is not.
  7608. @end table
  7609. If @var{FLAGS} is not specified, a default value of @code{[enter]} is
  7610. assumed.
  7611. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  7612. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  7613. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  7614. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
  7615. the given @var{COMMAND}.
  7616. Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
  7617. sequences of characters starting with @code{#} until the end of line,
  7618. are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
  7619. A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
  7620. follows:
  7621. @example
  7622. @var{COMMAND_FLAG} ::= "enter" | "leave"
  7623. @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} ::= @var{COMMAND_FLAG} [(+|"|")@var{COMMAND_FLAG}]
  7624. @var{COMMAND} ::= ["[" @var{COMMAND_FLAGS} "]"] @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  7625. @var{COMMANDS} ::= @var{COMMAND} [,@var{COMMANDS}]
  7626. @var{INTERVAL} ::= @var{START}[-@var{END}] @var{COMMANDS}
  7627. @var{INTERVALS} ::= @var{INTERVAL}[;@var{INTERVALS}]
  7628. @end example
  7629. @subsection Examples
  7630. @itemize
  7631. @item
  7632. Specify audio tempo change at second 4:
  7633. @example
  7634. asendcmd=c='4.0 atempo tempo 1.5',atempo
  7635. @end example
  7636. @item
  7637. Specify a list of drawtext and hue commands in a file.
  7638. @example
  7639. # show text in the interval 5-10
  7640. 5.0-10.0 [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=hello world',
  7641. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=';
  7642. # desaturate the image in the interval 15-20
  7643. 15.0-20.0 [enter] hue s 0,
  7644. [enter] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=nocolor',
  7645. [leave] hue s 1,
  7646. [leave] drawtext reinit 'fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text=color';
  7647. # apply an exponential saturation fade-out effect, starting from time 25
  7648. 25 [enter] hue s exp(25-t)
  7649. @end example
  7650. A filtergraph allowing to read and process the above command list
  7651. stored in a file @file{test.cmd}, can be specified with:
  7652. @example
  7653. sendcmd=f=test.cmd,drawtext=fontfile=FreeSerif.ttf:text='',hue
  7654. @end example
  7655. @end itemize
  7656. @anchor{setpts}
  7657. @section setpts, asetpts
  7658. Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
  7659. @code{setpts} works on video frames, @code{asetpts} on audio frames.
  7660. This filter accepts the following options:
  7661. @table @option
  7662. @item expr
  7663. The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
  7664. @end table
  7665. The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
  7666. constants:
  7667. @table @option
  7668. @item FRAME_RATE
  7669. frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
  7670. @item PTS
  7671. The presentation timestamp in input
  7672. @item N
  7673. The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
  7674. not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
  7675. @item NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES
  7676. The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
  7677. audio)
  7678. @item NB_SAMPLES, S
  7679. The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
  7680. @item SAMPLE_RATE, SR
  7681. The audio sample rate.
  7682. @item STARTPTS
  7683. The PTS of the first frame.
  7684. @item STARTT
  7685. the time in seconds of the first frame
  7686. @item INTERLACED
  7687. State whether the current frame is interlaced.
  7688. @item T
  7689. the time in seconds of the current frame
  7690. @item POS
  7691. original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
  7692. for the current frame
  7693. @item PREV_INPTS
  7694. The previous input PTS.
  7695. @item PREV_INT
  7696. previous input time in seconds
  7697. @item PREV_OUTPTS
  7698. The previous output PTS.
  7699. @item PREV_OUTT
  7700. previous output time in seconds
  7701. @item RTCTIME
  7702. The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds.. This is deprecated, use time(0)
  7703. instead.
  7704. @item RTCSTART
  7705. The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
  7706. @item TB
  7707. The timebase of the input timestamps.
  7708. @end table
  7709. @subsection Examples
  7710. @itemize
  7711. @item
  7712. Start counting PTS from zero
  7713. @example
  7714. setpts=PTS-STARTPTS
  7715. @end example
  7716. @item
  7717. Apply fast motion effect:
  7718. @example
  7719. setpts=0.5*PTS
  7720. @end example
  7721. @item
  7722. Apply slow motion effect:
  7723. @example
  7724. setpts=2.0*PTS
  7725. @end example
  7726. @item
  7727. Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
  7728. @example
  7729. setpts=N/(25*TB)
  7730. @end example
  7731. @item
  7732. Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
  7733. @example
  7734. setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
  7735. @end example
  7736. @item
  7737. Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
  7738. @example
  7739. setpts=PTS+10/TB
  7740. @end example
  7741. @item
  7742. Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
  7743. @example
  7744. setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
  7745. @end example
  7746. @item
  7747. Generate timestamps by counting samples:
  7748. @example
  7749. asetpts=N/SR/TB
  7750. @end example
  7751. @end itemize
  7752. @section settb, asettb
  7753. Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
  7754. It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
  7755. It accepts the following parameters:
  7756. @table @option
  7757. @item expr, tb
  7758. The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
  7759. @end table
  7760. The value for @option{tb} is an arithmetic expression representing a
  7761. rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
  7762. timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
  7763. audio only). Default value is "intb".
  7764. @subsection Examples
  7765. @itemize
  7766. @item
  7767. Set the timebase to 1/25:
  7768. @example
  7769. settb=expr=1/25
  7770. @end example
  7771. @item
  7772. Set the timebase to 1/10:
  7773. @example
  7774. settb=expr=0.1
  7775. @end example
  7776. @item
  7777. Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
  7778. @example
  7779. settb=1+0.001
  7780. @end example
  7781. @item
  7782. Set the timebase to 2*intb:
  7783. @example
  7784. settb=2*intb
  7785. @end example
  7786. @item
  7787. Set the default timebase value:
  7788. @example
  7789. settb=AVTB
  7790. @end example
  7791. @end itemize
  7792. @section showcqt
  7793. Convert input audio to a video output (at full HD resolution), representing
  7794. frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
  7795. Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
  7796. The filter accepts the following options:
  7797. @table @option
  7798. @item volume
  7799. Specify the transform volume (multiplier). Acceptable value is [1.0, 100.0].
  7800. Default value is @code{16.0}.
  7801. @item timeclamp
  7802. Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
  7803. accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
  7804. event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
  7805. otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
  7806. (such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is @code{0.17}.
  7807. @item coeffclamp
  7808. Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
  7809. more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
  7810. Default value is @code{1.0}.
  7811. @item gamma
  7812. Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
  7813. makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
  7814. Default value is @code{3.0}.
  7815. @item fps
  7816. Specify video fps. Default value is @code{25}.
  7817. @item count
  7818. Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
  7819. per second. Note tha audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
  7820. Default value is @code{6}.
  7821. @end table
  7822. @subsection Examples
  7823. @itemize
  7824. @item
  7825. Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
  7826. @example
  7827. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  7828. @end example
  7829. @item
  7830. Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
  7831. @example
  7832. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
  7833. @end example
  7834. @item
  7835. A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
  7836. @example
  7837. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  7838. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
  7839. @end example
  7840. @item
  7841. Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
  7842. @example
  7843. ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
  7844. asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
  7845. @end example
  7846. @end itemize
  7847. @section showspectrum
  7848. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
  7849. spectrum.
  7850. The filter accepts the following options:
  7851. @table @option
  7852. @item size, s
  7853. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  7854. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
  7855. @code{640x512}.
  7856. @item slide
  7857. Specify if the spectrum should slide along the window. Default value is
  7858. @code{0}.
  7859. @item mode
  7860. Specify display mode.
  7861. It accepts the following values:
  7862. @table @samp
  7863. @item combined
  7864. all channels are displayed in the same row
  7865. @item separate
  7866. all channels are displayed in separate rows
  7867. @end table
  7868. Default value is @samp{combined}.
  7869. @item color
  7870. Specify display color mode.
  7871. It accepts the following values:
  7872. @table @samp
  7873. @item channel
  7874. each channel is displayed in a separate color
  7875. @item intensity
  7876. each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
  7877. @end table
  7878. Default value is @samp{channel}.
  7879. @item scale
  7880. Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
  7881. It accepts the following values:
  7882. @table @samp
  7883. @item lin
  7884. linear
  7885. @item sqrt
  7886. square root, default
  7887. @item cbrt
  7888. cubic root
  7889. @item log
  7890. logarithmic
  7891. @end table
  7892. Default value is @samp{sqrt}.
  7893. @item saturation
  7894. Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
  7895. alternative color scheme. @code{0} is no saturation at all.
  7896. Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
  7897. Default value is @code{1}.
  7898. @item win_func
  7899. Set window function.
  7900. It accepts the following values:
  7901. @table @samp
  7902. @item none
  7903. No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
  7904. @item hann
  7905. Hann window
  7906. @item hamming
  7907. Hamming window
  7908. @item blackman
  7909. Blackman window
  7910. @end table
  7911. Default value is @code{hann}.
  7912. @end table
  7913. The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
  7914. section.
  7915. @subsection Examples
  7916. @itemize
  7917. @item
  7918. Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
  7919. @example
  7920. showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
  7921. @end example
  7922. @item
  7923. Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using @command{ffplay}:
  7924. @example
  7925. ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
  7926. [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
  7927. @end example
  7928. @end itemize
  7929. @section showwaves
  7930. Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
  7931. The filter accepts the following options:
  7932. @table @option
  7933. @item size, s
  7934. Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
  7935. the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
  7936. is "600x240".
  7937. @item mode
  7938. Set display mode.
  7939. Available values are:
  7940. @table @samp
  7941. @item point
  7942. Draw a point for each sample.
  7943. @item line
  7944. Draw a vertical line for each sample.
  7945. @end table
  7946. Default value is @code{point}.
  7947. @item n
  7948. Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
  7949. larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
  7950. integer. This option can be set only if the value for @var{rate}
  7951. is not explicitly specified.
  7952. @item rate, r
  7953. Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
  7954. option @var{n}. Default value is "25".
  7955. @end table
  7956. @subsection Examples
  7957. @itemize
  7958. @item
  7959. Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
  7960. at the same time:
  7961. @example
  7962. amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
  7963. @end example
  7964. @item
  7965. Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
  7966. frame rate of 30 frames per second:
  7967. @example
  7968. aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
  7969. @end example
  7970. @end itemize
  7971. @section split, asplit
  7972. Split input into several identical outputs.
  7973. @code{asplit} works with audio input, @code{split} with video.
  7974. The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
  7975. unspecified, it defaults to 2.
  7976. @subsection Examples
  7977. @itemize
  7978. @item
  7979. Create two separate outputs from the same input:
  7980. @example
  7981. [in] split [out0][out1]
  7982. @end example
  7983. @item
  7984. To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
  7985. outputs, like in:
  7986. @example
  7987. [in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
  7988. @end example
  7989. @item
  7990. Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
  7991. one padded:
  7992. @example
  7993. [in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
  7994. [splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
  7995. [splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
  7996. @end example
  7997. @item
  7998. Create 5 copies of the input audio with @command{ffmpeg}:
  7999. @example
  8000. ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
  8001. @end example
  8002. @end itemize
  8003. @section zmq, azmq
  8004. Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
  8005. filters in the filtergraph.
  8006. @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} work as a pass-through filters. @code{zmq}
  8007. must be inserted between two video filters, @code{azmq} between two
  8008. audio filters.
  8009. To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
  8010. headers and configure FFmpeg with @code{--enable-libzmq}.
  8011. For more information about libzmq see:
  8012. @url{http://www.zeromq.org/}
  8013. The @code{zmq} and @code{azmq} filters work as a libzmq server, which
  8014. receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
  8015. @option{bind_address} option.
  8016. The received message must be in the form:
  8017. @example
  8018. @var{TARGET} @var{COMMAND} [@var{ARG}]
  8019. @end example
  8020. @var{TARGET} specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
  8021. the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
  8022. @var{COMMAND} specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
  8023. @var{ARG} is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
  8024. given @var{COMMAND}.
  8025. Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
  8026. is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
  8027. will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
  8028. @example
  8029. @var{ERROR_CODE} @var{ERROR_REASON}
  8030. @var{MESSAGE}
  8031. @end example
  8032. @var{MESSAGE} is optional.
  8033. @subsection Examples
  8034. Look at @file{tools/zmqsend} for an example of a zmq client which can
  8035. be used to send commands processed by these filters.
  8036. Consider the following filtergraph generated by @command{ffplay}
  8037. @example
  8038. ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
  8039. color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
  8040. color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
  8041. nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
  8042. [bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
  8043. [bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
  8044. @end example
  8045. To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
  8046. command can be used:
  8047. @example
  8048. echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
  8049. @end example
  8050. To change the right side:
  8051. @example
  8052. echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
  8053. @end example
  8054. @c man end MULTIMEDIA FILTERS
  8055. @chapter Multimedia Sources
  8056. @c man begin MULTIMEDIA SOURCES
  8057. Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
  8058. @section amovie
  8059. This is the same as @ref{movie} source, except it selects an audio
  8060. stream by default.
  8061. @anchor{movie}
  8062. @section movie
  8063. Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
  8064. It accepts the following parameters:
  8065. @table @option
  8066. @item filename
  8067. The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
  8068. device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
  8069. @item format_name, f
  8070. Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
  8071. the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
  8072. format is guessed from @var{movie_name} or by probing.
  8073. @item seek_point, sp
  8074. Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
  8075. starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
  8076. @code{av_strtod}, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
  8077. postfix. The default value is "0".
  8078. @item streams, s
  8079. Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
  8080. separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
  8081. same order. The syntax is explained in the ``Stream specifiers''
  8082. section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
  8083. respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
  8084. is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
  8085. @item stream_index, si
  8086. Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
  8087. the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
  8088. value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
  8089. audio instead of video.
  8090. @item loop
  8091. Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
  8092. If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
  8093. Default value is "1".
  8094. Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
  8095. changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
  8096. @end table
  8097. It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
  8098. a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
  8099. @example
  8100. input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
  8101. ^
  8102. |
  8103. movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
  8104. @end example
  8105. @subsection Examples
  8106. @itemize
  8107. @item
  8108. Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
  8109. on top of the input labelled "in":
  8110. @example
  8111. movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8112. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8113. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8114. @end example
  8115. @item
  8116. Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
  8117. labelled "in":
  8118. @example
  8119. movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
  8120. [in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
  8121. [main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
  8122. @end example
  8123. @item
  8124. Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
  8125. dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
  8126. connected to the pad named "audio":
  8127. @example
  8128. movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
  8129. @end example
  8130. @end itemize
  8131. @c man end MULTIMEDIA SOURCES